Journey
OWNER’S MANUAL
2016
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . ..............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ..................................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . ..............................113
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ......................................293
5
STARTINGANDOPERATING ....................................................415
6
WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES..................................................519
7
MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE...................................................549
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ....................................................617
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ............................................625
10
INDEX .....................................................................637
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION ........................4
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............4
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............6
䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........6
䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
1
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left hand side
of the engine block.
VIN Location
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition ..............12
▫ KeyFob.............................13
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........14
▫ General Information ....................15
䡵 SENTRY KEY ..........................16
▫ Replacement RKE Key Fobs ..............17
▫ Customer RKE Key Fob Programming .......17
▫ General Information ....................18
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................18
▫ Rearming Of The System .................18
▫ To Arm The System.....................19
▫ To Disarm The System ...................19
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........20
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................21
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........21
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........22
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............23
2
▫ Using The Panic Alarm ..................23
▫ Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs ......24
▫ RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement ..........24
▫ General Information ....................26
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................26
▫ How To Use Remote Start ................27
▫ Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped ..........................27
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode...............28
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle ..........................28
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle ..........................29
▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ..........................29
▫ General Information ....................29
䡵 DOOR LOCKS .........................30
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................30
▫ Power Door Locks .....................32
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................33
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO ..................36
▫ General Information ....................40
䡵 WINDOWS ...........................40
▫ Power Windows .......................40
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................43
䡵 LIFTGATE ............................44
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........45
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............46
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................47
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........63
▫ Child Restraints .......................78
▫ Transporting Pets .....................106
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .106
䡵 SAFETY TIPS .........................107
▫ Transporting Passengers .................107
▫ Exhaust Gas .........................108
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle .........................109
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ...................111
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob (RKE
Key Fob) and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the RKE Key Fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a low or
dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be
used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side
(side opposite of the emergency key) of the RKE Key Fob
against the engine START/STOP button and push to
operate the ignition.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove compart-
ment. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Emergency Key Removed
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK or the manual transmission
into REVERSE, and apply the parking brake. Al-
ways make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
“OFF” mode, remove the RKE Key Fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
(Continued)
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the RKE Key Fobs from vehicle, place the ignition in
the OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system a factory-mated RKE Key Fob, a Keyless Push
Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthor-
ized vehicle operation. Therefore, only RKE Key Fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the
engine to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone tried to use an invalid RKE Key
Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting sys-
tems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement RKE Key Fobs
NOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,
it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the RKE Key Fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position.
NOTE: Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed
at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of pro-
gramming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electron-
ics. A blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been
programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System ser-
viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
Customer RKE Key Fob Programming
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button for unauthorized opera-
tion. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior
switches for door locks are disabled. If something trig-
gers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide
the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in
the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after 3 minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after
15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
Alarm will rearm itself.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ (refer to
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
valid Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry
door handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-
Go⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙
for further information).
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (re-
quires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
on the RKE Key Fob cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob to unlock the doors
or open any door or liftgate.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF
position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from
distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a
hand-held Key Fob with RKE Key Fob. The RKE Key Fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE Key Fob
buttons for all RKE Key Fobs.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE
Key Fob once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the
unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also
turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
1st Press Of RKE Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK
button on the RKE Key Fob. To change
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Key Fob With RKE Key Fob
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key Fob.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE Key Fob. The
time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current set-
ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob
to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the
button on the RKE Key Fob for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is acti-
vated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the
button a second
time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE Key Fob to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs
Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer.
RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
Emergency Key Removal Separating RKE Key Fob Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob to start the engine conveniently
from outside the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of approxi-
mately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Gear selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle Security Alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep RKE Key Fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or
other controls could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds.
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE Key Fob. However, the
ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button.
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in
the EVIC until you push the START button.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the driver heated seat
feature will automatically turn on in cold weather. This
feature will stay on through the duration of Remote Start
or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN
position.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings — Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information on Remote Start Comfort System
operation.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
Manual Door Lock Knob
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the RKE
Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
If you push the power door lock switch, with the ignition
in the ON/RUN or ACC position and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Turning off the ignition or closing the door will allow the
locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Auto Unlock On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in PARK.
4. Any vehicle door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock knob up to the UNLOCK position, roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside
door handle.
To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2.
Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE Key Fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grabbing The Door Handle
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Key Fob In Vehicle:
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is OFF.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
Key Fobs. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key
Fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs are detected outside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry
RKE Key Fob can be locked in the vehicle).
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
To Enter The Liftgate:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, push the button underneath the left
side of the accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
below the glass, to lock or unlock the vehicle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect System, the
key protection described in ⬙Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry RKE Key Fob in Vehicle⬙
remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
Key Fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
Key Fob lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all of the door windows.
Power Window Switches
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Uconnect, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
On some models, the driver and front passenger power
window switches have an Auto-up feature. Pull the
window switch up to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
up to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the
window path before closing the window. Such en-
trapment may result in serious injury.
Reset AUTO-Up
Should the AUTO-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset AUTO-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the down position). To enable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button again (setting it in
the up position).
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked pushing the
UNLOCK or LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob, the Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)
LOCK/UNLOCK button underneath the left side of the
accent bar, which is located on the liftgate below the glass
or by activating the power door lock switch located on
either front door trim panel.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information on
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry).
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with
the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or
the door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and
pull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and
support the liftgate in the open position.
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
power liftgate functionality.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with temperature,
it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the
liftgate in cold weather.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. These fumes could
injure you and your passengers. Keep the liftgate
closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
blower switch on the climate control is set at high
speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints
• Child Restraints
Liftgate Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙ in this
section of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in
a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a
rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition is placed in the START or ON/RUN position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition is first placed
in the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent
chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition is first placed in the START or ON/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on
until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
(Continued)
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Removing Slack From Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
Adjustable Anchorage
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature — If Equipped
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the outboard front and rear
seating positions (if equipped with outboard rear seat
Energy Management feature) that may help further re-
duce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat
belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —
If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
• ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Third Row Shown — If Equipped
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable compo-
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspec-
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever-
ity and type of the impact.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING! (Continued)
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-
straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered during a
collision, the front half of the head restraint will be
extended forward and separated from the rear half of the
head restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle
after the AHRs have deployed. The head restraint must
be reset into the original position to best protect the
occupant for all types of collisions. An authorized FCA
US LLC dealer must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat before driving. Personally attempt-
ing to reset the AHRs may result in damage to the AHRs
that could impair their function.
AHR In Reset Position
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect you in all
types of collisions. Have deployed AHRs reset by an
authorized dealer immediately.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3—
Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
•
Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-
termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING! (Continued)
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Side Impacts
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-
sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from the START or ON/RUN position to the OFF posi-
tion. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is placed in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
(Continued)
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Cana-
da’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-
index-53.htm
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining
Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not
reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Con-
vertible Child Restraint, facing
rearward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
Small Children Children who are at least two
years old or who have out-grown
the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint
with a five-point Harness, facing
forward in the rear seat of the ve-
hicle
Larger Children Children who have out-grown
their forward-facing child restraint,
but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and
the vehicle seat belt, seated in the
rear seat of the vehicle
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Size, Height, Weight Or
Age
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Children Too Large for Child Re-
straints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is
not designed to manage the crash forces of this type
of car seat. In a crash, the support leg may not
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
function as it was designed by the car seat manufac-
turer, and your child may be more severely injured as
a result.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each
outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 inches (119 cm) and 57 inches
(145 cm) tall.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
NOTE:
The second row bench with Integrated Child
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during use.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
booster seat position.
Release Loop
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Booster Seat
Proper Belt Use
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
WARNING!
Securely lock the seat cushion into position before
using the seat. Otherwise, the seat will not provide
the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury or death.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchor / Top Tether Locations
(Third Row Shown – If Equipped)
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraint LATCH Positions
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes 5 Passenger Vehicle: All second row head
restraints are removable.
7 Passenger Vehicle: All second and third
row head restraints are removable.
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat Lower Anchorages
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
second row seating position, located on the
back of the seat, near the floor.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 5 lower LATCH anchorages in the rear
seat. Anchorages A and B are used for the right outboard
position behind the front passenger (1). Anchorages D
and E are used for the left outboard position behind the
driver (3). Anchorages B and C are used for the center
seating position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
Tether Anchorages (Second Row 60/40)
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
You can install up to two child seats using the LATCH
system at the same time. If you are installing three child
restraints, you must use the seat belt to install the center
child restraint. You can use either the LATCH anchors for
positions (1) and (3) or the vehicle’s seat belt for installing
the child seats in the outboard positions.
Options for installing two child seats using the LATCH
anchorages in this vehicle:
1.
Right and left outboard seating positions (1 and 3):
Install the child seats in the right and left outboard
seating positions using lower anchorages A and B, and
D and E. Do not use the center seat anchorage, C. If the
child seats do not block the center seat belt webbing and
buckle, the center seat belt can be used to restrain an
occupant or child restraint in the center seating position.
2. Left outboard and center seating positions (3 and 2):
Install the first child seat in the left outboard seating
position using lower anchorages D and E. Install the
second child seat using the center anchorages, B and
C. Do not use the outer anchorage closest to the
opposite door, A. Do not use the remaining right
outboard seating position (1) for any occupant. The
center child restraint will block the seat belt buckle for
this position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING!
• Use anchorages B and C to install a LATCH-
compatible child restraint in the center seating
position (2). Do not install a LATCH-compatible
child restraint using anchorages C and D. This is
not a LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
• A child restraint installed in the center position (2)
will block the seat belt buckle for the empty right
outboard seating position (1). Do not use this seat
for another occupant.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• If you are installing three child restraints next to
each other, you must use the seat belt and the center
tether anchor for the center position. You can then
use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat
belt for installing the child seats in the outboard
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
positions. Please refer to “Installing the LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1.
Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a
child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt
path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind
all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-
ditional information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Third Row Shown – If Equipped
• ALR - Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
• CINCH = Cinching Latchplate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes 5 Passenger Vehicle: All second row head
restraints are removable.
7 Passenger Vehicle: All second and third
row head restraints are removable.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-
end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch
plate into the buckle with the release button facing out,
away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to
complete the installation of the child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING! (Continued)
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one
is available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
Seat Track Release Lever
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An
unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured,
or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle.”
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not drive the
vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the
easy entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped up-
ward and seat moved forward), as this position is
only intended for entering and exiting the third
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen-
ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seri-
ously or even fatally injured.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should turn on and remain on for
four to six seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, or if the light stays on, flickers, or
turns on while driving, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS ............................119
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped .....119
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .120
▫ Outside Mirrors ......................121
▫ Power Mirrors .......................121
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped.......122
▫ Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped .....123
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........123
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .124
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE (4.3) ................125
▫ Uconnect 4.3 .........................125
▫ Operation ..........................127
▫ Phone Call Features ...................134
▫ Uconnect Phone Features ................139
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............143
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ......................143
▫ General Information ...................147
䡵 UCONNECT PHONE (8.4/8.4N) ............148
▫ Uconnect 8.4/8.4Nav ...................148
3
▫ Operation ..........................151
▫ Phone Call Features ...................162
▫ Uconnect Phone Features ................167
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity ............171
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ......................172
▫ General Information ...................183
䡵 VOICE COMMAND ....................183
▫ Uconnect 8.4/8.4 Nav ..................183
▫ Uconnect Voice Commands ..............186
䡵 SEATS ..............................197
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped ........198
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped ............200
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped .........201
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments ...........202
▫ Recliner Adjustment ...................203
▫ Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment —
If Equipped .........................204
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat —
If Equipped .........................204
▫ Head Restraints ......................206
▫ Third Row Passenger Seats —
Seven Passenger Models.................211
▫ 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats .....211
▫ 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature —
Seven Passenger Models ................218
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........221
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 LIGHTS .............................223
▫ Headlight Switch .....................223
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......224
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............224
▫ Headlight Time Delay ..................225
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ...........225
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................225
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............226
▫ Multifunction Lever ...................227
▫ Turn Signals .........................227
▫ Lane Change Assist ...................228
▫ High/Low Beam Switch ................228
▫ Flash-To-Pass ........................228
▫ Interior Lights .......................228
▫ Map/Reading Lights ...................230
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......230
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............231
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............231
▫ Windshield Washers ...................233
▫ Mist Feature .........................233
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............234
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .234
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................235
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................236
▫ To Activate ..........................237
▫ To Set A Desired Speed .................238
▫ To Deactivate ........................238
▫ To Resume Speed .....................238
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............238
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............240
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED .........................241
▫ ParkSense Sensors .....................241
▫ ParkSense Warning Display ..............241
▫ ParkSense Display .....................242
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense .........245
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System .............................245
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System ...........246
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions........246
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED .........................248
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................251
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights ................251
▫ Sunglasses Storage ....................252
▫ Interior Observation Mirror ..............253
▫ Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped .......253
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .254
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .255
▫ Programming A Rolling Code .............256
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........258
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......259
▫ Using HomeLink .....................261
▫ Security ............................261
▫ Troubleshooting Tips ...................261
▫ General Information....................262
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........263
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express ..............264
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........264
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express...............264
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........264
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................265
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express ..............265
▫ Sunshade Operation....................265
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................265
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................265
▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................266
䡵 POWER OUTLETS .....................266
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED ........270
▫ Power Inverter Operation ................271
䡵 CUPHOLDERS ........................272
䡵 STORAGE ............................274
▫ Glove Compartment ...................274
▫ Floor Console Storage ..................274
▫ Center Console Storage .................275
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage —
If Equipped..........................277
▫ Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped ................278
▫ In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . .278
䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES ................280
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped ......280
▫ Cargo Management System ..............281
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............286
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............286
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................287
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .288
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel.
Power Mirror Switches
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Models Without Express Window Feature
Push the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
and then push one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
Models With Express Window Feature
Push and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then push one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in
order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror
position following an adjustment.
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in,
pushing the switch a second time will return the mirrors
to the normal driving position.
NOTE: If the vehicle speed is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h) the folding feature will be disabled.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), they
will automatically unfold.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/
unfolded.
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button. (this may require multiple button
pushes). This resets them to their normal position.
Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions:
forward, rearward and normal.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-
ing the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT PHONE (4.3)
Uconnect 4.3
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo-
bile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”)
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”)
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”)
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,”
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
Recent Calls”)
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”)
Screen Activated Features:
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touchscreen
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the
touchscreen
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect Customer Support:
• U.S. residents – visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400.
• Canadian Residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features.
Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone
manufacturer for details.
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
Uconnect Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten
mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and
one audio device can be used with the system at a time.
The system is available in English, Spanish, or French
languages.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone
Button is used to
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view
phonebook etc., When you press the button
you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give
a command.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command
Button is
only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones
or make another call.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or
from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
equipped.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile,” the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan-
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the “Voice Command”
button on your steering
wheel.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push
the Phone
button on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions
begin with a push of the Phone
button on the radio
control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the Phone
or Voice Command
button on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main
or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect
website may also provide detailed instructions for pair-
ing.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. You can do either of the following:
a. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate, page
down to the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen, press it and you will see the Paired
Phones screen. If there are no paired phones you
will see <Empty> as the first device name.
b. Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press
the “Phone” button on the touchscreen and you
will go to the Uconnect Phone main screen. Press
the “Settings” button on the touchscreen. If there
are no phones currently paired a pop-up will
appear. If you select Yes you will go the Paired
Phones screen, if you select No you will return to
the Uconnect Phone main menu.
2. At the Paired Phones screen press the “Add Device”
button on the touchscreen and a pop-up with instruc-
tions will appear.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, select
the “Uconnect” device and enter the PIN.
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device
1. Push the PLAYER button on the faceplate to begin.
2. Press the “Source” button on the touchscreen.
3. Change the Source to Bluetooth.
4. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
Audio Device. When prompted on the device, select
the “Uconnect” device and enter the PIN.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired
will have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices.
• “Show Paired Audio Devices.”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
range. If you need to choose a particular Phone or Audio
Device follow these steps:
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/
Audio” button on the touchscreen and then an Audio
Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Connect
Device” button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Disconnect
Device” button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Delete De-
vice” button on the touchscreen.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate.
2. Press the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touch-
screen.
3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device.
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. At the Options pop-up screen press the “Make Favor-
ite” button on the touchscreen; you will see the chosen
device move to the top of the list.
5. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps.
1. Press the “Phonebook” button on the touchscreen
from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the “911/Help” button on the touchscreen. Press
the appropriate listing to alter, Emergency for ex-
ample.
3. Once Emergency is pressed, the “Edit” button on the
touchscreen appears. Press the “Edit” button on the
touchscreen and you will be given the choice to Edit
Number or Reset to Default.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect Phone.
• Redial
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Dial by pressing in the number
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
done with one call or less active.
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the Phone
button on your steering wheel to
begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
• Answer
• End
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreen to enter
the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the Voice Command
button while in a call and say
“1234#” or you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if
Voicemail password is stored in your mobile phone-
book.
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls button
on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed.”
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or
Ignore. Press the Answer button on the touchscreen or
push the Phone
button on the steering wheel to
accept the call.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Uconnect Phone will then interrupt the
vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Push the Phone
button to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. Or you can place
a call on hold by pressing the “Hold” button on the
touchscreen, then dial a number from the dialpad,
recent calls or from the phonebooks. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Join Calls” in
this section.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
push the Phone
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time. Also you can press the “Swap” button
on the touchscreen, on the Phone main screen.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “End”
button on the touchscreen or the Phone
button. Only the
active call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call. If the active call is
terminated by the far end, a call on hold may not become
active automatically. This is cell phone-dependent.
Redial
1. Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or push
the Phone
button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
2. The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
• Push the Phone
button to begin.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assis-
tance.”
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-521-2779 for U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico
City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in
Mexico). Please refer to the FCA US LLC 24-Hour “Road-
side Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet and on the 24-Hour Roadside Assistance
Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
touchscreen or push the Voice Command
button and
say the word “Send” then the sequence you wish to
enter. For example, if required to enter your PIN
followed with a pound, (3746#),youcanpush the
Voice Command
button and say, “Send3746#.”
Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure,
and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
book entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password,” then
if you push the Voice Command
button and say
“Send Voicemail Password,” the Uconnect Phone will
then send the corresponding phone number associ-
ated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the
phone.
NOTE:
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth. These
additional symbols will be ignored when dialing a
numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The Voice Command
button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “There are two numbers with the name John.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Say the full name” you could push the Voice Com-
mand
button and say, “John Smith” to select that
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
1. Push the MORE button on the faceplate, then press the
“Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen, then
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect Phone will work the same as
if you dial the number using voice a command.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the
call did not go through even though the call is in progress.
Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect Phone simply press the “Mute”
button on the Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
Phone main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect
Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather condition
NOTE:
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect Phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
• Fully closed windows
• Dry weather conditions
• Operation from the driver’s seat
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect Phone
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be reestablished by switching the phone off/
on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Voice Tree
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
for John Smith.
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect sys-
tem is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth than these com-
mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
UCONNECT PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
Uconnect 8.4/8.4Nav
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect Phone allows
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo-
bile” or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith Mobile”).
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,”
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
Recent Calls”).
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
• Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touchscreen.
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth Device via the
touchscreen.
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicles audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone. For
Uconnect customer support, visit the following website:
• U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-
855-8400.
• Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
Uconnect Phone.
The Uconnect Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone
button is used to
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent incoming and outgoing calls, view
phonebook along with other features. When
you push the button you will hear a BEEP. The beep is
your signal to give a command.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command
button is
only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones
or make another call.
The Voice Command
button is also used to access
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Com-
mand features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see
the Uconnect Voice Command section for direction on
how to use the Voice Command
button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles
audio system. The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be
adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or
from the steering wheel radio control (right switch), if so
equipped.
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural Lan-
guage Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the “Voice Command”
button on your steering
wheel.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push
the Phone
button on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions
begin with a push of the Phone
button on the radio
control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can also push the Phone
or Voice Command
button on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main
or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth enabled on your mobile
phone to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect
website may also provide detailed instructions for pair-
ing.
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
Mobile Phone Pairing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled mo-
bile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the
name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
• If “No” is selected, press the “Settings” button from
the Uconnect Phone main screen.
• Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth en-
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect
screen.
• See step 4 to complete the process.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress screen
while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the “Settings” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
• “Show Paired Phones”
• “Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the “Player” button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth.
3. Press the “Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth enabled
audio device. When prompted on the device, enter the
PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices:
• “Show Paired Phones”
• “Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio
Device follow these steps:
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Sources”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular
Audio Device.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5.
Press the “Disconnect Device” button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Pair Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
than the currently connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the “Delete Device” button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
5. Press the “Make Favorite” button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the
list.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect Phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
press and hold a favorite button on the top of the
phone main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phone-
book from the Phone main screen, then select the
appropriate number. Press the “+” next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites.”
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” button on
the touchscreen and then select the “+” button on the
touchscreen located to the right of the phonebook
Phonebook Favorites
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
record. Select an empty entry and press the “+” on that
selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears,
press “Add from Mobile.” You will then be asked
which contact and number to choose from your mo-
bile phonebook. When complete the new favorite will
be shown.
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “+” next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
Add From Mobile
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. The Options pop-up will display, press “Remove from
Favs.”
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Press the “Phonebook” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Favorites” button on the touchscreen. Scroll
to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and
Towing Assistance Favorites.
3. Press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
Remove From Favorites
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
4. Press the “+” next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number
to default.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and sup-
ported by Bluetooth on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the
features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect Phone.
• Redial
• Dial by pressing in the number
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
• Favorites
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
• SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the Phone
button to begin,
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 151 1234 5555,”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number 151-1234-
5555.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the Phone
button on your steering wheel to
begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
• Answer
• End
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the Voice Command
button on your steering wheel
while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say
“Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
Recent Calls
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
These can be accessed by pressing the “recent calls”
button on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my recent calls” from any screen and the All calls
screen will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone
button on the steering wheel to
accept the call. You can also press the “answer” button
on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Push the Phone
button on the steering
wheel, or press the “answer” button on the touch-
screen, or caller ID box, to place the current call on
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the “Hold”
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Join Calls” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the “Hold” button on the
Phone main screen.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the “Swap” button on the Phone main screen. Only
one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone
button to toggle be-
tween the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily push the Phone
button or press the “end” button on the touch-
screen. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or push the
Phone
button and after the “Listening” prompt and
the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” button on the touchscreen when leaving the
vehicle.
Uconnect Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect Phone will
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
NOTE:
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touchscreen.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
• The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
mobile phone directly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assis-
tance.”
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-521-2779 for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
in Mexico). Please refer to the FCA US LLC 24-Hour
“Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty
Information Booklet and in the Owner’s Information
Manual on the DVD under “Other References.”
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
touchscreen or push the Voice Command
button and
say the word “Send” then the sequence you wish to
enter. For example, if required to enter your PIN
followed with a pound, (3746#),youcanpush the
Voice Command
button and say, “Send3746#.”
Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure,
and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
Password”, then if you push the Voice Command
but-
ton and say “Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect
Phone will then send the corresponding phone num-
ber associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over
the phone.
NOTE:
• The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth. These
additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a
numbered sequence.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The Voice Command
button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “There are two numbers with the name John.
Say the full name” you could push the Voice Com-
mand
button and say, “John Smith” to select that
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, then
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect Phone will work the same as
if you dial the number using voice a command.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,
after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the
call did not go through even though the call is in progress.
Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect Phone simply press the “Mute”
button on the Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
Phone main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth
connection between a Uconnect Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
• Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½ inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
a voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Condition
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number com-
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions
• Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your
phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth to use this
feature. If the Uconnect Phone determines your phone is
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
not compatible with SMS messaging over Bluetooth the
“Messaging” button will be grayed out and the feature
will not be available for use.
NOTE: Uconnect Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect Phone, an announcement will be
made to notify you that you have a new text message.
Voice Text List
Voice Text Reply
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
• Send a Reply
• Forward
• Call
Send Messages Using Buttons On The Touchscreen:
You can send messages using Uconnect Phone. To send a
new message:
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “messaging” button on the touchscreen then
“New Message.”
3. Press one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to.
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
sent.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
Preset Message List
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pushing the Voice Command
button and saying the message you want to send.
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
Preset Message List
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
17. I’m lost.
18. See you later.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the connection can
generally be re-established by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Voice Tree
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
for John Smith.
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after
pushing the Uconnect Voice Command button on the
steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
while the VR session is active.
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
only the first number encountered in a contact name
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voice-
mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth then these com-
mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that
have been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands
such as “Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assis-
tance” will call the corresponding number stored with
those contacts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
for John Smith.
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth then these com-
mands will return a response that the contact does not
exist in the phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
VOICE COMMAND
Uconnect 8.4/8.4 Nav
The Uconnect Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and
SiriusXM Travel Link.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
or a raised voice level.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
When you push the Uconnect Voice Command
but-
ton, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give
a command.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session will end.
Pushing the Uconnect Voice Command
button while
the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can
say a command. This will become helpful once you start
to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
“Help.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear available commands, push the Uconnect Voice
Command
button and say “Help.” You will hear
available commands for the screen displayed.
Natural Speech
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
the Uconnect Voice Command
button.
Uconnect Voice Commands
The Uconnect Voice Command system understands two
types of commands. Universal commands are available at
all times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pushing the Uconnect Voice Com-
mand
button.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect Voice
Command
button.
Source
To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
mode or screen:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Voice Tree
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
• You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
• You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
• You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any correspond-
ing names on the current device that is playing.
• You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
• Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod is connected and playing.
• VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
connected device.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
• You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
• You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
• You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
• Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re-
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
• You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertain-
ment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,”
“Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,”
“Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.”
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
shaded grey.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down,
forward, rearward or to tilt the seat.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Seat Switch
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat. Push the switch forward to increase
the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to de-
crease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or down-
ward on the switch will raise or lower the position of the
support.
Power Lumbar Switch
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
once to turn the HI
setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the LO setting ON.
• Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WARNING! (Continued)
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
desired position has been reached. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjustment
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright posi-
tion, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
(Continued)
Seatback Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
WARNING! (Continued)
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The seat height control lever is located on the outboard
side of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the
lever to lower the seat. The total seat travel is approxi-
mately 2.15 inches (55 mm).
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up
to the instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
hardback surface that you can use as a work surface
when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in
motion.
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the
seat.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
Fold-Flat Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) —
Front Seats
Supplemental Active Head Restraints are passive, de-
ployable components, and vehicles with this equipment
can not be readily identified by any markings, only
through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head
restraint will be split in two halves, with the front half
being soft foam and trim, the back half being decorative
plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for further
information.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-
ment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Adjustment Button Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re-
straint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental
Active Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active Head
Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing” for further information.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions
in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a collision.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac-
tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re-
straint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Second Row Seats
The second row seats are equipped with adjustable and
removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint,
pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head
restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base
of the head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment and
the release buttons while pulling upward on the whole
assembly and raise it up as far as it can go. To reinstall the
headrest, put the headrest posts into the holes while
pushing the release buttons. Then adjust it to the appro-
priate height.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Start-
ing”.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models
These head restraints are non-adjustable and non-
removable. However, you can fold them forward when
they are not in use by passengers. Refer to “50/50 Split
Third-Row Passenger Seats With Fold-Flat Feature —
Seven Passenger Models” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
of a collision.
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats
To provide additional storage area, each second-row
passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for ex-
tended cargo space and still maintains some seating room
if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,
make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position.
This will allow the second-row seat to fold easily.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passen-
ger to sit in a third row seat with the second row
seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the passenger
could slide underneath the seat belt and be seri-
ously or even fatally injured.
To Fold The Seat
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
the seat.
Seatback Release
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle
pressure.
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
lever.
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to objects,
keep your head, arms, and objects out of the folding
path of the seatback.
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
To Unfold The Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift
the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release
the lever once the seat is in the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjustment
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once
the seatback is in the upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger Seat
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the
seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to re-
lease the latch and then downward to lower the
seatback/armrest.
Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when not
in use, or when additional seating area is required.
WARNING!
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be
certain that the seatback/armrest is locked securely
into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Stadium Tip ’n Slide (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) —
Seven Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
Seatback/Armrest
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the
seat to allow for full seat travel.
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the seat cush-
ion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its tracks.
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry
and exit from the third-row passenger seats.
Tip ’n Slide Control Lever
Tip ’n Slide Seat
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this posi-
tion, as it is only intended for entering and exiting
the third row seats. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat
Rearward
Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and
then continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until
it locks in place.
Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked
securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause
serious injury.
50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models
To provide additional storage area, each third-row pas-
senger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for ex-
tended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating
room if needed.
NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seatback,
make sure the second-row passenger seatback is not in a
reclined position. This will allow the seatback to fold
easily.
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Fold The Seatback
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, push the seatback forward slightly, and
release the release-loop. Then, continue to push the
seatback forward. The head restraints will fold automati-
cally as the seatback moves forward.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left
folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and
by simply opening the seats to the open position, over
time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
To Unfold The Seatback
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the
seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint to
lock it in place.
Seatback Release
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position.
To do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of
the seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and
release the release-loop.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the
event of a collision.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Assist Strap
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever
near the center of the grille between the grille and
hood opening. Push the safety latch lever to the left
and then raise the hood.
Hood Release
Underhood Safety Latch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
3. Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the
hole on the underside of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Hood Prop Rod
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of
the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog
lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination for
up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights or ignition
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable us-
ing the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings —
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights will turn ON the first time
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain ON unless
the parking brake is applied. Upon returning to the
PARK position, the DRLs will turn OFF. DRLs will turn
OFF when the ignition is switched OFF.
NOTE: The daytime running lights can be turned on and
off using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings — Customer Programmable Features” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate when the low beam
headlights or parking lights are on. However, selecting
the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a con-
tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. The Battery Protection also includes the glove
compartment light and the trunk light. To restore interior
light operation after automatic battery protection is en-
abled (Lights OFF), either place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position or cycle the light switch.
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating the
dimmer control upward with the parking lights or head-
lights on will increase the brightness of the instrument panel
lights, door map pockets and cupholders (if equipped).
Dome Light Position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Dimmer Controls
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Refer to “Overhead Console” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located at the end of the lever. For information on using
the rear window wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window
Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle”.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the wind-
shield wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five
detents to select the desired delay interval.
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two
seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mph
(16 km/h). At speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the
delay varies from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-
tion.
Front Wiper Control
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
“park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
position.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than OFF.
• In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch
is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned OFF, and the blades cannot return to the
“park” position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Front Wiper Control
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three
wipe cycles and then turn OFF.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multi-
function lever, inward to the first detent to activate a
single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or
spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to
operate until you release the lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -
2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this
system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79
inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist Ready
Park Assist System Off
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Arcs None 3 Solid
(Continuous)
3 Slow
Flashing
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
When the ParkSense button is pushed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYS-
TEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the gear selector is moved to RE-
VERSE and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display
the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist system has detected a fault condition, the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST”,
or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
the system has detected a fault condition, the EVIC will
display the ⬙CLEAN PARK ASSIST⬙, ⬙SERVICE PARK
ASSIST⬙,OR⬙SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM⬙ mes-
sages for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the outer
surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is
clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruc-
tion and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues
to appear see an authorized dealer.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense off, the EVIC will display
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense is turned off, the EVIC will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the EVIC.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear License plate.
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the
vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle while
a dashed center-line will indicate the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. The static
grid lines will show separate zones that will help indicate
the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror and
an optional power sunroof switch.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console has two courtesy lights. The lights
turn on when a front door, a rear door or the liftgate is
opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob is pushed. The
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Push in on
each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Push the lens a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pushing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Sunglasses Storage
To access the storage compartment, push on the raised
bars on the compartment door in the center of the console
and release and the door will swing downward.
Courtesy/Reading Light
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides the
driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to
conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passen-
ger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, push on
the raised bars on the compartment door and release (the
door will swing downward), then raise the door until it is
almost closed and release. The door will latch in position
to use the interior observation mirror.
NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the door
can only be closed.
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pushing the latch again to
release.
Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
Refer to “Power Sunroof” in “Understanding the Fea-
tures Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Observation Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink Buttons/Overhead Consoles
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended
that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT
the button that is normally used to open and close the
door. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held
transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-
held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actua-
tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to
full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement.
The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Push the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
POWER OUTLETS
A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located in the center
console below the radio. The power outlet has power
available when the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC
position.
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do not
hold the lighter in the heating position.
Front 12 Volt Power Outlet
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located inside
the center console storage area. Power is available with
the ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC or LOCK position.
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back
of the center console. This power outlet has power
available when the ignition is in the LOCK, ON or ACC
position.
Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet
has power available when the ignition is in the ON or
ACC position.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and
element must be used.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• The power outlet on the bottom of the center
console shares the fuse with the power outlet on
the back of the console. The combined usage must
not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power Outlet
Console Rear
2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel & Power
Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the bat-
tery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC (150
Watt maximum) power outlet located on the back of the
center console. This outlet can power mobile phones,
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles
will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
Power Inverter
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Inverter Operation
The power inverter is turned On and Off using the
Uconnect System.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect 4.3
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the “More” button on the faceplate (located next
to the Uconnect display).
2. Press the “Outlet” button on the touchscreen (located
on the Uconnect display) to turn the power inverter
On or Off.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 And 8.4 Nav
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the “Controls” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Outlet” button on the touchscreen to turn
the power inverter On or Off.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders, located in the center floor
console, for the front passengers.
For passengers in the second row there are two cuphold-
ers, located in the center armrest between the two seats.
When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the
back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can be
adjusted to better position the cupholders.
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.
Floor Console Cupholders
Armrest Cupholders
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped
with bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the
door trim panels.
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burn-
ing the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Door Bottle Holder
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
Floor Console Storage
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the floor
console.
Glove Compartment
Floor Console Cubby Bin
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Center Console Storage
There is a storage tray and storage compartment located
under the center console armrest.
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the lid, to gain access to the storage tray and storage
compartment.
Center Console
Center Console Storage Tray
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
The storage tray can be slid forward and rearward or
removed to access the center console storage compart-
ment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Sliding Armrest
The center console armrest can also slide rearward for
easy access to the storage area.
Center Console Storage Compartment
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Flip ’n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of the
seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback.
Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then
forward to open the seat to the detent position.
Sliding Armrest
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passen-
gers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers
— If Equipped
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located
on the back of the drivers seatback.
In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat.
Each 1.6 gal (5.9L) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35L)
Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
cans, plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner
allows for easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if
equipped). Pull the door latch release-loop upward to
release the latch and then forward to open the bin door.
The liner can be removed for easy cleaning.
In-Floor Storage
Removable Liner
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped
The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging station
in the left rear quarter trim panel. To remove it, push on the
indent on the side of the flashlight and release.
To operate the flashlight, push the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging
station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation
the next time you need it.
Rechargeable Flashlight
Three-Push Switch
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Management System
Five Passenger System Features
• A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
storage bin.
• A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
• Cargo tie-downs.
• A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped).
Seven Passenger System Features
• A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger
seats.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Ve-
hicle” for further information.
• Cargo tie-downs.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
(Continued)
Cargo Tie-Downs
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de-
scribed on the label attached to the left door or left
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to
sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five
Passenger Models
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into the left attachment point
or the right attachment point (shown).
Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the
cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite
side of the vehicle.
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the
cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attach-
ment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the notches in
the trim panels. Lower the cover to position the posts into
the bottom of the notches and release the handle.
WARNING!
A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could
cause injury in a collision. It could become airborne
during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo
floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its mount-
ing. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for rear wiper operation.
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
position to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump will continue to operate as long as the
switch is held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle three
times before returning to the set position.
Rear Wiper/Washer
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
CAUTION!
• Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the ON
position.
• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
the blade cannot return to the park position, dam-
age to the rear wiper motor may occur.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to
carry cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be distributed uniformly over the
cross rails. In addition, the roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the
total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof
rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
NOTE: The roof rack side rails on your vehicle are NOT
designed to carry a load without the addition of cross-
bars.
Metal crossbars are offered by MOPAR accessories to
provide a functional roof rack system. See your autho-
rized dealer.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Move The Crossbars
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each crossbar approxi-
mately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the
side rail.
2. Relocate the crossbars, aligning the crossbar stan-
chions (end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on
the outboard surface of the side rail for proper posi-
tioning. There are four frontward marks for the front
crossbar and four rearward marks for the rear cross-
bar. Make sure the crossbars remain equally spaced or
parallel at any position for proper function.
3. Tighten the knobs on each crossbar to lock it in
position. As you tighten the knob, make sure the
clamp tooth engages completely into the side rail slot.
4. Attempt to move the crossbar to ensure that it is
locked in position.
Crossbar Knobs
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when installing the cross-
bars, make sure the arrows marked on the underside
of the crossbars face the front of the vehicle.
• To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the
crossbars are not in use, fasten the front crossbar in the
fourth position from the front and the rear crossbar in
the eighth position. The tie down holes on the crossbar
ends should always be used to tie down the load.
Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
CAUTION!
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or other protective layer between
the load and the roof surface.
• Crossbars should remain equally spaced or parallel
at any roof rack position for proper function. Non-
compliance could result in damage to the roof rack,
cargo, and vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropri-
ately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, should be
secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle.
(Continued)
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in per-
sonal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........296
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................297
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS .......299
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights ..............300
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights ............312
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights ............321
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights ............323
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights..............324
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) .......................325
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays ............................327
▫ Oil Change Due ......................329
▫ Fuel Economy ........................330
▫ Vehicle Speed ........................332
▫ Trip Info ...........................332
▫ Tire Pressure .........................333
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .334
▫ Messages ...........................334
▫ Turn Menu OFF.......................334
4
䡵 CYBERSECURITY.......................335
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................336
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate................336
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen..............337
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4.3 Settings ...................337
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect System 8.4 Settings .............349
䡵 UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) —
IF EQUIPPED .........................362
▫ Getting Started .......................362
▫ Single Video Screen ....................363
▫ Play Video Games .....................364
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While
A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 ..........365
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System .............................366
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio . . .366
▫ VES Remote Control — If Equipped ........367
▫ Remote Control Storage .................370
▫ Locking The Remote Control .............371
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries......371
▫ VES Headphones Operation ..............371
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries.........372
▫ Controls ............................373
▫ Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty ...........................374
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ System Information ....................375
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL ...............384
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......384
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions .............384
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation ...........................385
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media
(i.e., CD) Operation ....................385
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........385
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .386
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................386
▫ Manual Three Zone Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped ..............387
▫ Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) —
If Equipped .........................394
▫ Automatic Three Zone Temperature Control
(ATC) With Touchscreen — If Equipped......398
▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .........................407
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Side Window Demist Outlet 6 — Switch Bank 11 — Engine Start/Stop Button
2 — Air Outlet 7 — Uconnect Hard Controls 12 — Hood Release Lever
3 — Instrument Cluster 8 — SD Memory Card Slot 13 — Dimmer Controls
4 — Uconnect System 9 — Power Outlet 14 — Headlight Switch
5 — Glove Compartment 10 — CD/DVD Slot
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Premium Instrument Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
1. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump arrow symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
(Continued)
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-
sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-
buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is palaced
in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
United States
Canada
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
placing the ignition in the position ON/RUN position.
The light should illuminate for approximately two sec-
onds. The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light
does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4
minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system
is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tem-
perature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for ser-
vice. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further infor-
mation.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-
gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-
gencies.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-
hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-
pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-
able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If
Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-
fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-
eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-
viced as soon as possible if this occurs.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the en-
gine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ig-
nition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Wait To Start Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Wait To Start Light
The “Wait To Start” telltale will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition
is turned to the RUN position. It’s duration may be longer based on colder operating condi-
tions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no longer displayed. Refer to “Starting
Procedures” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
NOTE: The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is
warm enough.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “Electronic Speed
Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Radio Info
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Information
• Messages
• Turn Menu OFF
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
The system allows the driver to select information by push-
ing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menus and
submenus.
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menus and
submenus.
• RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button for
access to main menus or submenus. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
to reset features.
• BACK Button
Push and release the BACK button to scroll
back to a previous menu.
EVIC Controls
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line
and outside temperature are displayed.
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
messages are displayed.
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom-
eter line.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure.⬙
• Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Push Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start.⬙
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex-
amples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Un-
available - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On.⬙
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
• Remote Start aborted — Door ajar
• Remote Start aborted — Hood ajar
• Remote Start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Remote Start aborted — Fuel low
• Remote Start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Remote Start active — Push Start Button
• Vehicle Not in Park
• Key Left Vehicle
• Key Not Detected
• Push Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
• Service Keyless System
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
• Lamp Out (with vehicle graphic showing which of the
4 turn signals is/are out)
• Key Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Door/s Ajar (one or more doors open, with a single
chime if the vehicle is moving.
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
Monitor” in “Starting And Operating”
• Service TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Starting
And Operating”
• Channel # Transmit
• Channel # Training
• Channel # Trained
• Clearing Channels
• Channels Cleared
• Did Not Train
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting
And Operating”)
• Oil Change Due (with a single chime)
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
appear in the EVIC and display for 5 seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled
oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
UP
arrow button. To reset the oil change indicator
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
perform the following procedure:
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the ignition
to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until “Fuel Economy” displays highlighted in the
EVIC and push the RIGHT
arrow button. The
following Fuel Economy functions will display in the
EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or
show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history information
will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last
fuel average reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the RIGHT
arrow button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Fuel Economy
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
This display shows the instantaneous MPG or L/ 100 km
in bar graph form while driving. This will monitor the
gas mileage in real-time as you drive and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Vehicle Speed
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until “Vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the
EVIC. Push the RIGHT
arrow button to display the
current speed in mph or km/h. Pushing the RIGHT
arrow button a second time will toggle the unit of
measure between MPH or km/h.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
EVIC.
Trip Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until “Trip Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and
push the RIGHT
arrow button. Pushing the
RIGHT arrow button with ⬙Trip Info⬙ highlighted
will cause the EVIC display to show Trip A, Trip B,
and Elapsed Time all in one display. If you want to
reset one of the three functions you use the UP
or
DOWN arrow button to highlight (select) the fea-
ture that you want to reset. Pushing the RIGHT
arrow button will cause the selected feature to reset
individually. The three features can only be reset
individually. The following Trip functions display in
the EVIC:
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
Trip A
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the
last reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since the
last reset.
Trip B
• Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the
last reset.
• Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since the
last reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow but-
ton once to clear the resettable function.
Tire Pressure
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until “Tire PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC.
Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to view
a graphic of the vehicle with a tire pressure value at
each corner of the graphic.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until “Vehicle Info” displays in the EVIC and push the
RIGHT
arrow button. Push the UP or DOWN
arrow button to scroll through the available infor-
mation displays.
• Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Transmission Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN arrow button
until “Messages: XX” displays highlighted in the
EVIC. If there is more than one message, pushing the
RIGHT
arrow button will display a stored warning
message. Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button if there is more than one message to
step through the remaining stored messages. If there
are no messages, pushing the RIGHT
arrow button
will not change the display.
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the UP
or DOWN
arrow button. Pushing the RIGHT arrow but-
ton clears the menu display. Pushing any one of the
four EVIC buttons will bring the menu back.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
WARNING! (Continued)
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-
havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
NOTE:
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-
update to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-
not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Onboard Di-
agnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and right
side of the Uconnect 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect Touchscreen.
CAUTION!
Do not attach any object to touchscreen, doing so can
result in damage to the touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
4.3 Settings
In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped such as
Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights,
Doors & Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation,
Compass Settings, Audio and Phone/Bluetooth Setup
through buttons on the faceplate and touchscreen.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
1 — Uconnect 4.3 Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to access the
Settings screen, use the “Page Up”/“Page Down” but-
tons on the touchscreen to scroll through the following
settings. Press the desired setting button on the touch-
screen to change the setting using the description shown
on the following pages for each setting.
Display
• Brightness
Press the “Brightness” button on the touchscreen to
change this display. When in this display, you may select
display brightness with the headlights on and the head-
lights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and “–”
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Mode
Press the “Mode” button on the touchscreen to change
this display. When in this display, you may select one of
the auto display settings. To change Mode status press
the “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen,
then by press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4.3 Buttons On The Touchscreen
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Language
Press the “Language” button on the touchscreen to
change this display. When in this display, you may select
one of three languages for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation system (if
equipped). Press the “English,” “French” (Français) or
“Spanish” (Español) button on the touchscreen to select
the language preferred. Then press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen. As you continue, the information will
display in the selected language.
• Units
Press the “Units” button on the touchscreen to change
this display. When in this display, you may switch the
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped)
between US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or
“Metric” then press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen. As you continue, the information will display in
the selected units of measure.
• Voice Response
Press the “Voice Response” button on the touchscreen to
change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the
Voice Response Length, press and release the “Brief” or
“Long” button on the touchscreen. Then press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen.
• Touchscreen Beep
Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the touchscreen
to turn on or shut off the sound heard when a button on
the touchscreen is pressed. To change the Touchscreen
Beep setting press and release the “ON” or “OFF” button
on the touchscreen, then press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Clock
• Set Time
Press the “Set Time” button on the touchscreen to change
this display. When in this display, you may select the time
display settings. To make your selection, press the “Set
Time” button on the touchscreen, adjust the hours and
minutes using the up and down buttons on the touch-
screen, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr.
• Show Time Status
Press the “Show Time Status” button on the touchscreen
to change this display. When in this display, you may
turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. To
change the Show Time Status setting, press and release
the “ON” or “OFF” button on the touchscreen.
• Sync Time — If Equipped
Press the “Sync Time” button on the touchscreen to
change this display. When in this display, you may have
the radio set the time automatically. To change the Sync
Time setting, press and release the “ON” or “OFF” button
on the touchscreen.
Safety & Driving Assistance
• Park Assist — If Equipped
Press the “Park Assist” button on the touchscreen to
change this display. The Rear Park Assist system will
scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission
gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less
than 11 mph (18 km/h). The system can be enabled with
Sound Only, Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To
change the Park Assist status, press and release the
“OFF,” “Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button
on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park As-
sist” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for system function and operating information.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
Press the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen to
change this display. When this feature is selected, the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for
system function and operating information. To make
your selection, press the “Hill Start Assist” button on the
touchscreen and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Lights
• Headlights Off Delay — If Equipped
Press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the
headlights remain on after the engine is shut off. To
change the Headlights Off Delay setting, press the
“Headlights Off Delay” button on the touchscreen, and
choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 seconds.
• Illuminated Approach
Press the “Illuminated Approach” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0,
30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob. To change the
Illuminated Approach status, press the “0,” “30,” “60” or
“90” button on the touchscreen.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
Press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position,
the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds
after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also
turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were
turned on by this feature. To make your selection, press
the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen
and select “ON” or “OFF.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Auto High Beams — If Equipped
Press the “Auto High Beams” button on the touchscreen
to change this display. When this feature is selected, the
high beam headlights will deactivate automatically un-
der certain conditions. To make your selection, press the
“Auto High Beams” button on the touchscreen and select
“ON” or “OFF.” Refer to “Automatic Headlights — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, the headlights will turn on whenever the engine is
running. To make your selection, press the “Daytime
Running Lights” button on the touchscreen and select
“ON” or “OFF.”
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
Press the “Steering Directed Lights” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, the headlights turn relative to a change in direc-
tion of the steering wheel. To make your selection, press
the “Steering Directed Lights” button on the touchscreen
and select “ON” or ‘OFF.”
• Flash Lamps With Lock
Press the “Flash Lamps With Lock” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are
locked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob.
This feature may be selected with or without the sound
horn on lock feature selected. To make your selection,
press the “Flash Lamps With Lock” button on the touch-
screen and select “ON” or “OFF.”
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Doors & Locks
• Auto Unlock On Exit
Press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped
and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your
selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” button on the
touchscreen and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen.
• Auto Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto
Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
• Flash Lamps With Lock
Press the “Flash Lamps With Lock” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are
locked or unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Key Fob. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
With Lock” button on the touchscreen and select “ON” or
“OFF.” Then press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen to change this display. When this feature is
selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is
activated. To make your selection, press the “Sound Horn
With Remote Start” button on the touchscreen and select
“ON” or “OFF.” Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• Sounds Horn With Lock
Press the “Sounds Horn With Lock” button on the
touchscreen to change this display. When this feature is
selected, the horn will chirp when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob.
To make your selection, press the “Sounds Horn With
Lock” button on the touchscreen and select “ON” or
“OFF.” Then press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen.
• Remote Door Unlock Order
Press the “Remote Door Unlock Order” button on the
touchscreen to change this display. When Unlock Driver
Door Only On 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s door
will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) Key Fob UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver
Door Only On 1st Press is selected, you must press the
RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
pressing the handle more than once will only result in the
driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only On
1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened, the
interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock
all the doors (or use the RKE Key Fob).
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go) — If Equipped
Press the “Passive Entry” button on the touchscreen to
change this display. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the
RKE Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make your
selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touch-
screen and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to “Keyless
Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle”.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
• Auto On Heated Seats — If Equipped
Press the “Auto On Heated Seats” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When the temperatures are
below 40° F (4.4° C) the Driver’s heated seat will turn on.
To make your selection, press the “Auto On Heated
Seats” button on the touchscreen and select “ON” or
“OFF.”
Engine Off Options
• Headlight Off Delay
Press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. When this feature is se-
lected, the driver can choose to have the headlights
remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the
vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay status, press
the “0,” “30,” “60” or “90” button on the touchscreen.
• Engine Off Power Delay
Press the “Engine Off Power Delay” button on the
touchscreen to change this display. When this feature is
selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect
phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if
equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power
Delay status, press the “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Compass Settings
• Variance
Press the Variance button on the touchscreen to change
this display. Compass Variance is the difference between
Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate
for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone
where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once
properly set, the compass will automatically compensate
for the differences, and provide the most accurate com-
pass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Calibration
Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to
change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass.
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is
Compass Variance Map
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by press-
ing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and completing
one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large
metal or metallic objects) until the CAL indicator dis-
played in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an
environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Audio
• Equalizer
Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to
change this display. When in this display, you may adjust
the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Adjust the settings with
the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by
selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Balance/Fade
Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the touchscreen to
change this display. When in this display, you may adjust
the Balance and Fade settings.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-
screen to change this display. This feature increases or
decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the
Speed Adjusted Volume, press the “OFF,” “1,” “2” or “3”
button on the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
• Music Info Cleanup
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
music navigation. To make your selection, press the
Music Info Cleanup button on the touchscreen and select
“ON” or “OFF”.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the “Surround Sound” button on the touchscreen to
change this display. This feature provides simulated
surround sound mode. To make your selection, press the
“Surround Sound” button on the touchscreen and select
“ON” or “OFF.”
Phone/Bluetooth
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement.
SIRIUS Setup
• Channel Skip
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
• Subscription Info
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to
access the Subscription Information screen.
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
System 8.4 Settings
Press the “More” button on the touchscreen, then press
the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance,
Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start,
Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen
will allow you to toggle up or down through the avail-
able settings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” button on the touch-
screen. Then press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the “Set Language” button on the touchscreen and then
press the desired language button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the language, show-
ing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Press “US” or
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a button on the touchscreen is
pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster — If Equipped
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, press the “Fuel Saver Display” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time
setting press the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
• Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
• Set Time Minutes
• Time Format
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Park Assist — If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
Assist status, press and release the “OFF,” “Sound Only”
or “Sounds and Display” button. Then press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense
Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for system function and operating infor-
mation.
• ParkView Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of
the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, press the “ParkView Backup Camera” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlights Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key
Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status, press
the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your
desired time interval.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but-
ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press the “Auto High Beams”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Refer to “Automatic Headlights — If Equipped” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-
ing that setting has been selected.
• Steering Directed Headlights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
your selection, press the “Steering Directed Lights” but-
ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lamps with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock
On Exit” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Auto Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto
Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
• Flash Headlights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the signal lights will flash
when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob. To make your selection, press the
“Flash Lights With Lock” button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the
remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the
“Sound Horn With Lock” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when the
remote start is activated. To make your selection, press the
“Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob UNLOCK button.
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must press
the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK button.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is programmed to Unlock All Doors
1st Press, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door 1st
Press is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock
when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle
more than once will only result in the driver’s door
opening. If driver door first is selected, once the driver
door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be
used to unlock all doors (or use RKE Key Fob).
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• Auto-On Driver Heated Seat With Vehicle Start — If
Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). To make your selection, press the “Auto On
Heated Seats” button on the touchscreen, until a check-
mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off
Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,⬙
“5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the touchscreen.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touch-
screen to select your desired time interval.
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the com-
pass module is located, and it can cause interference with
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
Compass Variance Map
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
• Perform Compass Calibration
Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to
change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,
which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass.
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
and it may need to be calibrated. You may also calibrate
the compass by pressing the “ON” button on the touch-
screen and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in
an area free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
CAL indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Music Info Cleanup
This feature helps organize music files for optimized music
navigation. To make your selection, press the “Music Info
Cleanup” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off”.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
• Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to re-
subscribe.
Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to
access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
UCONNECT MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES) — IF EQUIPPED
Your rear seat Video Entertainment System (VES) is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment. You can
play your favorite CDs or DVDs, listen to audio over the
wireless headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices. Please review
this Owner’s Manual to become familiar with its features
and operation.
Getting Started
• Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen.
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
Control knob.
• When the Video Screen is open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Overhead Video Screen
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES).
• The Remote Control
• The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
Play A DVD
1. Press the EJECT button on the radio faceplate (Touch-
screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
3. Ensure the VES Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push
ENTER on the Remote Control.
NOTE: The VES system will retain the last setting when
turned off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow).
2. Left audio in (white).
3. Right audio in (red).
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games consoles will ex-
ceed the power limit of the vehicle’s Power Inverter.
Refer to the Power Inverter section in your vehicle’s
Owner’s Manual for more information.
Ensure the remote control channel selector switch and
Headphone switch (IR channel) are the same number.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
2, by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
by repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push
ENTER on the Remote Control.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
“Power” button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for the
channel desired and press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control and the
Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
the desired audio source or repeatedly push the
MODE button on the remote until the desired audio
source appears on the screen.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
“Power” button on the touchscreen.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for the
channel desired and press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
• VES is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
simultaneously.
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and right side equates to Channel 2.
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
Channel 2 is for audio only.
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
will display on the screen and the audio will be heard
on Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the Video Screen is closed.
Play A DVD Using The Touchscreen Radio
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the Video Screen, highlight DISC by
either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pushing the MODE button, then push
ENTER.
NOTE:
• The VES system will retain the last setting when
turned off.
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Viewing a DVD on the Touchscreen radio screen is not
available in some regions or locations, the vehicle must
be stopped, and the gear selector must be in the PARK
position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In
vehicles with manual transmission the parking brake
must be engaged even when the vehicle is parked.
Refer to local and state laws.
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, press the
“Power” button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “1” or “2” button on the touchscreen for the
channel desired and press the “Source” button on the
touchscreen to select the desired mode.
VES Remote Control — If Equipped
VES Remote Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, push the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pushed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch – Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control.
When the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position,
the remote controls the functionality of headphone
Channel 1 (right side of the screen). When the selector
switch is in the Channel 2, position the remote controls
the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of
the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, push to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, push to select to the
previous station. In disc modes, push to advance to the
start of the current or previous audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
7. MENU – Push to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from
the Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
RANDOM for a CD).
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
pushing PROG Up selects the next preset and push-
ing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
the radio.
11. MUTE – Push to mute the headphone audio output
for the selected channel.
12. SLOW – Push to slow playback of a DVD disc. Push
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
13. STATUS – Push to display the current status.
14. MODE – Push to change the mode of the selected
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this
manual for details on changing modes.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, push the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select
the menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded
in the DVD player (if equipped) and the VES mode is
selected and the disc is stopped, push the SETUP
button to access the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD
Setup Menu of this manual.)
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, push to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
contents.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, push to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, push and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER – Push to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, push to select to the next
station. In disc modes, push to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compart-
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
VES Remote Control Storage
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
1. Press the “MORE” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Rear Entertainment” button on the touch-
screen to display the Rear Entertainment Controls.
3. Press the “Lock-out” button on the touchscreen to lock
the remote control. Pressing the “Lock-out” button on
the touchscreen a second time will unlock the remote
control.
NOTE: Remote control lock-out will only apply to the
current ignition cycle. The VES will automatically re-
move the lock-out if the ignition is cycled to “OFF”.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-
eration. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
VES Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
VES Headphones
1 — Volume Control
2 — Power Button
3 — Channel Selection Switch
4 — Power Indicator
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing The Audio Mode For Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
NOTE:
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES Channel 1.
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES Channel 2.
2. Push the MODE button on the remote control.
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pushing STATUS shows the status
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen.
Pushing the MODE button will advance to the next
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navi-
gate to the available modes and push the ENTER
button to select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, push the
BACK button on the remote control.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Unwired Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire-
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer-
able.
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace-
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE-
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU-
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired Do? Unwired, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired re-
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR-
RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-3332
or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired wireless headphones by
phone at 1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Information Mode Display
When information mode is active, the current mode setting
for both audio channels is displayed. In addition to the
items called out by number, the remaining information
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
displays the current status of the source (such as station
frequency, name, preset or track number, song title, artist
name, album name, etc.).
1. Channel 1 Mode — Displays the current source for
Channel 1.
2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio
only icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen
system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the
audio for Channel 1 has been muted using the remote
control’s MUTE button.
3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a
single screen system: The audio only icon is displayed
on Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode.
Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for
Channel 2 has been muted using the remote control’s
MUTE button.
4. Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source for
Channel 2.
5. Remote Locked Out — When the icon is displayed, the
remote control functions are disabled.
6. Clock — Displays the time.
7. Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is dis-
played, the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the
radio and playing through the cabin speakers.
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pushing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency or
track number. To enter the desired digit:
1. Push the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲, 䉴,
䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, push the remote con-
trol’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these
steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
push the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and push the remote control’s ENTER button.
Numeric Keypad Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pushing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons to find the desired station, push the
remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that station. To
jump through the list more quickly, navigate to the Page
Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pushing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Random play.
Options Menu
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Options”
button on the touchscreen activates the Options Settings
menu. From this menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles,
Angle and Title.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pushing the remote
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To change the settings, push the remote control’s naviga-
tion buttons to select an item, then push the remote
control’s navigation buttons to change the value for the
currently selected item. To reset all values back to the
original settings, select the Default Settings menu option
and push the remote control’s ENTER button.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
1. Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
2. Close the video screen.
3. To change the current audio mode, push the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the
MODE/SOURCE Select menu.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
Display Settings Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Disc Formats
The DVD player is capable of playing the following types
of discs (8 cm or 12 cm diameter):
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
• CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
DVD Region Codes
The DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will stop playing and a warning will be displayed.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the DVD player,
the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by default
(most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title, but the
Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program mate-
rial is automatically mixed down to two channels, which
may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If you
increase the volume level to account for this change in
level, remember to lower the volume before changing the
disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R,
DVD-RW and DVD-ROM discs.
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the DVD player may not be able to play
some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guide-
lines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or UDF format.
CD-DA may also be used for PCM Audio contained on
CD-Based Data.
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the DVD player, check with the disc recording
software publisher for more information about burning
playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R and DVD-RW) is with a perma-
nent marker. Do not use adhesive labels as they may
separate from the disc, become stuck, and cause perma-
nent damage to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3, WMA AND ACC)
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer 3 with data bitrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s,
including variable bit rates), WMA (All Standard 8.x, 9.x
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Windows Media Audio) and ACC (MPEG-4 audio; sam-
pling frequencies 8 to 48 kHz; mono and stereo) audio
files with the from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or
CD-RW).
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙, WMA files
must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or ⬙WMA⬙,
and ACC files must end with the extensions “.acc” or
“.m4a”. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
• For MP3 files, ID3 tag data v1, v1.1, v2 and v2.4 (such
as artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
player will automatically skip the file and begin play-
ing the next available file.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
previous file.
• To change the current directory, use the remote con-
trol’s PROG UP and Down buttons or Rewind/skip
back and fast fwd/skip forward.
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message is displayed on the Radio display and the disc is
automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or incompatible
disc format are all potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
first track.
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera-
ture is above 120°F (49°C). When this occurs, the DVD
player will display ⬙High Temp⬙ and will shut off the
display until a safe temperature is reached. This shut-
down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses other-
wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby,⬙⬙MLP
Lossless,⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights
reserved.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supple-
ment Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-hand
controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering
wheel to access the switches.
Right-Hand Switch Functions
• Push the top of the switch to increase the volume.
• Push the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation
• Push the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
• Push the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
• Push the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
• Push the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track.
• Push the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
• Push the switch up or down twice to listen to the
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
and so forth.
• Push the button located in the center of the switch to
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your
vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your
radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the instrument
panel or through the Uconnect system display.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Three Zone Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and right
side of the Uconnect 4.3 screen in the center of the
instrument panel. There are also buttons on the faceplate
located below the Uconnect touchscreen.
Uconnect 4.3 Manual with Touchscreen
Climate Button On The Faceplate
Manual Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Faceplate
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Uconnect 4.3 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 8.4 Manual 3 — Zone Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Push this button to choose between outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. An indicator
light will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode.
4. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
6. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect 8.4 Only)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect
8.4 Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4
Only)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 4.3 Only)
Press the driver or passenger temperature button on the
touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside
the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar
into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Mov-
ing the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler
temperatures. Driver and passenger have independent
temperature control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
Climate Control Functions
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in
the control button to blink and then turn off.
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
The rear MTC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons on the
touchscreen are located in the Uconnect touch system,
located on the instrument panel.
Uconnect 4.3 Manual Rear Climate Buttons On The
Touchscreen Controls Screen
1 — Blower Up Button 5 — Done Button
2 — Mode Button 6 — Rear Lock Button
3 — Temperature Button 7 — Rear Off Button
4 — Blower Down Button
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front Uconnect Touchscreen
The Three-Zone climate control system allows for adjust-
ment of the rear climate controls from the front ATC
panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear
control mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Con-
trol functions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press the ⬙REAR⬙ button
again, or it will revert to the Front screen after six
seconds.
Uconnect 8.4 Manual Rear Climate Button On The
Touchscreen Controls Screen
1 — Rear Lock Button 5 — Blower Up Button
2 — Front Climate Control But-
ton
6 — Mode Button
3 — Temperature Up Button 7 — Blower Down Button
4 — Temperature Down Button 8 — Rear Off Button
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Rear Lock
• Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
touchscreen on the Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates
a lock symbol in the rear display. The rear temperature
and air source are controlled from the front Uconnect
system.
• Rear occupants can only adjust the rear control when
the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned off.
• The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC) is lo-
cated in the headliner, near the center of the vehicle.
Rear MTC Control Knobs
1 — Blower Speed 3 — Rear MODE
2 — Rear Temperature 4 — Rear Temperature Lock
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel. The rear outlets are located
in the right side trim panel. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
Uconnect system.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect system,
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature
knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments
are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Automatic Three Zone Temperature Control (ATC)
With Touchscreen — If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located on the left and right
side of the Uconnect 4.3 screen in the center of the
instrument panel. There are also buttons on the faceplate
located below the Uconnect touchscreen.
Uconnect 4.3 Automatic Climate Button On The
Faceplate
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons On The Touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Uconnect 4.3 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature Controls
— Buttons On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic 3 — Zone Temperature Controls
— Buttons On The Touchscreen
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
7. Rear Climate Button — If Equipped
Press and release this button to turn on the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate when the rear
climate controls are ON. Performing this function again
will turn OFF the rear climate controls.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for warmer temperature set-
tings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
(Uconnect 8.4)
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
10. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
11. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
control knob counterclockwise.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
13. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect
8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
15. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
8.4)
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE:
In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.
16. Temperature Control (Uconnect 4.3)
Press the driver or passenger temperature button on the
touchscreen to regulate the temperature of the air inside
the passenger compartment. Moving the temperature bar
into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Mov-
ing the temperature bar into the blue area indicates cooler
temperatures. Driver and passenger have independent
temperature control if Sync mode is not illuminated.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE: If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if
needed.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-
matically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in
the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or press the
button on the touchscreen (4), on the Automatic Tem-
perature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature buttons on the touchscreen or
buttons on the faceplate. Once the desired temperature
is displayed, the system will achieve and automati-
cally maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this
section of the manual.
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automati-
cally.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
The rear system temperature control buttons are located
in the Uconnect system, located on the instrument panel.
Uconnect 4.3 Automatic Rear Climate Buttons
On The Touchscreen
1 — Blower Up Button 5 — Done Button
2 — Mode Button 6 — Rear Lock Button
3 — Temperature Button 7 — Rear Auto Button
4 — Blower Down Button 8 — Rear Off Button
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Rear Climate Buttons On The
Touchscreen
1 — Rear Auto Button 6 — Blower Up Button
2 — Rear Lock Button 7 — Mode Button
3 — Front Climate Button 8 — Blower Down Button
4 — Temperature Up Button 9 — Rear Off Button
5 — Temperature Down Button
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls From The
Front ATC Panel
The Three-Zone ATC system allows for adjustment of the
rear climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
• Press the ⬙REAR⬙ button to change control to rear
control mode, Rear display (below) will appear. Con-
trol functions now operate rear system.
• To return to Front screen, press the ⬙REAR⬙ button
again, or it will revert to the Front screen after six
seconds.
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen, illuminates a lock symbol in the
rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
controlled from the front Uconnect system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center
of the vehicle.
• Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
Uconnect touchscreen. This turns off the Rear Tem-
perature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automati-
cally adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 — Blower Speed 3 — Rear Mode 5 — AUTO Mode
2 — Rear Tempera-
ture
4 — Rear Tempera-
ture Lock
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The rear outlets are located in the right side trim
panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower
the temperature, and clockwise to increase the tempera-
ture. The rear temperature settings are displayed in the
Uconnect system.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect system,
the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature
knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments
are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
• The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat
occupants.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem, increase the blower
speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
NOTE:
• Recirculation mode without A/C should not be used
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES ................419
▫ Automatic Transmission ................419
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ...........420
▫ Normal Starting.......................420
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ................422
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................422
▫ After Starting ........................423
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .423
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............424
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock...............426
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .426
▫ Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission .........................426
▫ Gear Ranges .........................428
䡵 AUTOSTICK ..........................434
▫ Operation ...........................434
䡵 ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .436
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........436
▫ Acceleration .........................436
5
▫ Traction ............................437
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............438
▫ Flowing/Rising Water ..................438
▫ Shallow Standing Water .................438
䡵 POWER STEERING .....................439
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check ..............440
䡵 PARKING BRAKE ......................441
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM .......................443
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .444
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .445
▫ Brake System Warning Light..............445
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............445
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............447
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................448
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) ............451
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........451
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ...........456
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ...............456
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............457
▫ Tire Markings ........................457
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........461
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........463
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........464
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........469
▫ Tire Pressure ........................469
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................470
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .472
▫ Radial Ply Tires ......................472
▫ Tire Types ...........................473
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............474
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............475
▫ Tire Spinning ........................478
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................478
▫ Life Of Tire .........................479
▫ Replacement Tires .....................480
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......481
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....483
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .484
▫ Premium System ......................487
▫ General Information....................491
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................491
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................492
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............492
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......493
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................493
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................494
▫ Fuel System Cautions...................494
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............495
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED .........................496
▫ E-85 General Information ...............496
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ....................496
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
▫ Fuel Requirements ....................497
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles .......497
▫ Starting ............................498
▫ Cruising Range .......................498
▫ Replacement Parts ....................498
▫ Maintenance ........................498
䡵 ADDING FUEL ........................499
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............499
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............500
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING ....................501
▫ Vehicle Certification Label ...............501
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......501
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) .........501
▫ Overloading .........................502
▫ Loading ............................502
䡵 TRAILER TOWING .....................503
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............503
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............506
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........507
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............508
▫ Towing Requirements ..................509
▫ Towing Tips .........................514
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................516
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .516
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the parking
brake. Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the
vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
(Continued)
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob is
in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear
selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the EVIC (if equipped)
will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in Neutral, push and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button with the vehicle speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC
position.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and
START. To change the ignition positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these steps:
• Starting with the ignition in the OFF position.
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC will display
“ACC”).
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC will
display “ON/RUN”).
• Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC will
display “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
(Continued)
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce-
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate effect on the engine.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte-
grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
ⴖOFFⴖ mode. Remove the Key Fob from the vehicle,
and lock the vehicle. When the keyless ignition is
in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
(Continued)
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, re-
move the key fob from the vehicle and lock the
vehicle.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned OFF. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK.
This system also locks the transmission in PARK when-
ever the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in
PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the trans-
mission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned
to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
Four-Speed Or Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Inter-
lock System” in this section). To drive, move the gear
selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission gear selector has PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (-/+) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick
(-/+) position (below the Drive position) activates
Autostick mode, providing manual shift control and
displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster. In
AutoStick mode, tapping the gear selector left (-) or right
(+) will manually select the transmission gear.
Gear Selector
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the trans-
mission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
(Continued)
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. When the ignition is in the OFF position,
the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK
or the manual transmission into REVERSE. Always
make sure the keyless ignition node is in the “OFF”
mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
CAUTION!
• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear
selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the gear selec-
tor all the way forward and to the left until it stops and
is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold tempera-
tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to only second gear (for four-speed transmission)
or third gear (for six-speed transmission). Normal opera-
tion will resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in second gear (for four-speed transmission) or third gear
(for six-speed transmission) regardless of which forward
gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the
vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service
without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present:
• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
• The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission
is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is normal.
Using the AutoStick shift control, when the transmission
is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmis-
sion is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position
(below the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to
side. This allows the driver to manually select the trans-
mission gear being used. Moving the gear selector to the
left (-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The current gear will be displayed in the instrument
cluster.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when the driver moves the gear selector to the
right (+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in any gear except top
gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
second gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful
in snow or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is engaged.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
fault or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
•
Driving through standing water may cause damage to
your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect
your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission,
axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle
if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid
type.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the
(Continued)
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and
do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-
mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC).
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
You also may experience the following when ABS acti-
vates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-
cation may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake
System Warning Light” is not on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabili-
ties of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopar-
dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-
hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-
tion is always required while driving to maintain
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
WARNING! (Continued)
incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-
tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-
pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-
tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-
gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-
cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-
mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode
may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation,
which allows for more wheel spin than normally al-
lowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE:
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS
is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and driving conditions, influence the chance
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively
swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automati-
cally once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer
Towing” in this section for further information.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/ Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure –
Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-
tion of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con-
sult this manual to determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there
will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-
inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-
wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer
to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service
Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for
further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
this manual for more information relating to the Load
Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
(Continued)
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, P225/65R17 tire with a
Security Chain Company (SCC) Super Z6 low profile
traction device or equivalent is recommended.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The system will automatically update and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
CAUTION! (Continued)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic show-
ing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those in a
different color in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
EVIC will change color back to the original color, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will
also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPMS sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
NOTE:
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
EVIC will still display a pressure value in a different
color.
• After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will
display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need
to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide op-
timum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it
will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-
proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-
pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may
result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel
system components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-
line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of Top Tier
Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-
formance and damage the emissions control sys-
tem.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
(Continued)
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel Requirements
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
When switching fuel types:
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
NOTE:
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
rough idle following start up may be experienced even
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
•
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused
by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline additive, such
as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
FCA Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
FCA US LLC engines.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-
mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine
to start under cold conditions, may affect drivability,
and could cause engine damage.
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use
with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door rein-
forcement.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and push the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further infor-
mation.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control — Electronic
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compat-
ible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Com-
bined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Tongue
Wt.
2.4L/Automatic 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg) 22 sq ft
(2.0 sq m)
1,000 lbs (453 kg) which
includes up to 5 persons
& Luggage
100 lbs (45 kg)
3.6L/Automatic 7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft
(3.0 sq m)
2,500 lbs (1 133 kg)
which includes 1 to 2
persons & Luggage
200 lbs (90 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft
(3.0 sq m)
2,000 lbs (907 kg) which
includes 3 to 4 persons
& Luggage
150 lbs (68 kg)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg) 32 sq ft
(3.0 sq m)
1,500 lbs (680 kg) which
includes 5 to 7 persons
& Luggage
100 lbs (45 kg)
* Except for
AWD models
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
• * For All Wheel Drive (AWD) models carrying 5 to 7
persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) and therefore should not be
attempted.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Informa-
tion” placard for the maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule”. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
WARNING! (Continued)
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting And Operating” for information
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace-
ment procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
AutoStick shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the trans-
mission fluid and filter as specified for “police, taxi, fleet,
or frequent trailer towing”. Refer to the “Maintenance
Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the four-speed automatic transmission
fluid level before towing. The six-speed transmission
does not require a fluid level check before towing. If,
however, you notice fluid leakage or transmission mal-
function, see your authorized dealer immediately for
assistance.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
AutoStick
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “4” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or
“2” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces-
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD Models AWD Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
NOTE: When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels
are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a
tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow
this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the transmis-
sion in PARK.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires tow-
ing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the
ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recreational Towing — All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Mod-
els
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind an-
other vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on the
ground can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........520
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............520
▫ 2.4L Engine — If Equipped...............521
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................522
▫ Torque Specifications ..................522
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........523
▫ Jack Location ........................524
▫ Spare Tire Location ....................525
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................525
▫ Spare Tire Removal ....................526
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................528
▫ Jacking Instructions ...................528
▫ Road Tire Installation ...................535
䡵 JUMP-STARTING ......................538
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start ..............538
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure ................540
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............542
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............544
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........546
▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models ...........547
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models ..........548
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
instrument panel switch bank, above the climate controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to High. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the A/C turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the en-
gine OFF immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
2.4L Engine — If Equipped
On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too
hot during sustained high-speed driving or if towing a
trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL mes-
sage will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will
be reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h) maximum until the
engine oil temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The maximum vehicle speed is reduced to
48 mph (77 km/h), you may reduce vehicle speed further
as needed. Once the engine oil temperature is reduced,
you may continue to drive normally
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.5 19 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover
in the rear storage bin in the cargo area.
Jack Storage Location
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Location
The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch
mechanism.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector in PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For ex-
ample, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
Spare Tire Removal
NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch
mechanism.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
1 — Spare Tire Jack Handle
2 — Extension 1
3 — Extension 2
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the
small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
the end of component 3. This will lock these components
together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel
nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when
seated on component 2. This will make it easier to rotate
the assembly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jack-
handle assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire
is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you
to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the
winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and
raise it upright so the tire’s tread is on the ground.
4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and
remove it from the center of the wheel.
Spare Tire Retainer
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
Spare Tire Stowage
NOTE: Refer to “Spare Tire Removal” for information on
assembling the winch tools.
1. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold the
spare upright so that the tire’s tread is on the ground
and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel facing
away from the rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut. Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to
raise the spare tire into the storage area. Continue to
rotate the jack-handle assembly until you hear the
winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be over
tightened. Push against the tire several times to be
sure it is held securely in place.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from
stowage.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
3. Place the jack in the notches underneath the lift area
that is closest to the flat tire. Center the jack saddle
between the drain flute formations on the sill flange.
Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
Jacking Locations
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Front Jacking Location Front Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire
just clears the road surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
Rear Jacking Location Rear Jack Engaged With Jack Handle
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,
remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do
not pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the
hub.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
6. Install the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter-
clockwise with the jack handle.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec-
tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage
location. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced as soon as possible.
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the as-
sembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate
the jack-handle assembly clockwise until you hear
the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be
over tightened.
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack. Remove the wheel
blocks from the vehicle and release the park brake.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
tire pressure as required.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting
studs which are on each side of the valve stem. Install
the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut
toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use
a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For the correct lug
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2 — Valve Notch 5 — Road Wheel
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec-
tion. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2.
Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. For proper lug nut
torque refer to Torque Specifications in this secton. If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your authorized
dealer or service station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting, there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, push the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator
pedal. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure
that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning
the wheels or racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE:
Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙ESC Partial
Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙
mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
CAUTION! (Continued)
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the gear selec-
tor:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Open the center console and remove the gear selector
override access cover (located in the front lower right
corner of the console storage bin).
Gear Selector Override Access Cover
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the
access port, and push and hold the override release
lever forward.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF the Ground FWD MODELS AWD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE IF transmission is
operable:
• Transmission in
NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h)
max speed
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this
section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of
PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
mission may result.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission and/or power
transfer unit damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condi-
tions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing dolly, or
wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........551
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L ..........552
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .553
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ........................553
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............554
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............555
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................556
䡵 DEALER SERVICE ......................556
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........557
▫ Engine Oil ..........................558
▫ Engine Oil Filter ......................561
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................562
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ...............562
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............564
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped ............565
▫ Body Lubrication .....................567
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ...............568
7
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................570
▫ Exhaust System ......................571
▫ Cooling System ......................573
▫ Brake System ........................579
▫ Automatic Transmission ................581
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) –
AWD Models Only ....................585
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) –
AWD Models Only ....................586
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................586
▫ Cleaning The Cupholders ...............593
䡵 FUSES ..............................594
▫ Interior Fuses ........................595
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Power Distribution Center) ..............598
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS .................602
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ..................604
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp . .604
▫ Front Fog Lamp ......................605
▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp ........607
▫ License Plate Lamp ....................610
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ....................611
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................613
▫ Engine .............................613
▫ Chassis ............................615
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (4–Speed Only)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post) 11 — Coolant Reservoir Cap
6 — Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post) 12 — Engine Oil Dipstick
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Fill
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per-
sonal information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” section.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and push the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-
tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking engine oil level
when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect
reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range mark-
ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1.0
quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high
end of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and
10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Engine Oil Viscosity — 2.4L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or
Shell Helix is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
the engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Com-
partment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-
tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-
partment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance
intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assembly
do not need to be removed to access the compartment.
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-
Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
shield.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. The
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer using recovery and
recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. With the A/C air filter removed and
the blower operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes,
resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following steps to
replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove
compartment inward while gently pulling the glove
compartment door outward until both tabs clear the
door opening in the instrument panel.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
Glove Compartment Removal
A/C Air Filter Replacement
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Reinstall the glove compartment door. Make sure that
the hinges are seated fully as you raise the door.
Otherwise, the door latch will not align properly.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
liftgate glass.
Lifting The Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up-
ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
blade off of the liftgate glass.
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
blade holder.
Removing The Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer and the rear window washer
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
fluid when the message “LoWASH” appears in the
instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-
lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Ma-
terial Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Coolant Level
2.4L Engine — The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine idling and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines,
shown on the bottle.
3.6L Engine — The level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “COLD” and
“FULL” range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When
additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to main-
tain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
forming underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser-
voir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
(Continued)
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure
optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Flu-
ids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid
specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No
chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only
the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission seal-
ers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check — Four-Speed Automatic
Transmission
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60
seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of
this procedure.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the transmission
in PARK.
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt
from entering the transmission.
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. You can also read the transmission fluid
temperature using the Vehicle Information display in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
the instrument cluster. Refer to ⬙Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)⬙ in ⬙Understanding Your
Instrument Panel⬙ for further information. Hot fluid is
approximately 180°F (82°C), which is the normal op-
erating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least
15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably
between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a temperature
of approximately 80°F (27°C).
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated.
Then, remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
if the actual level is at or above the hole.
• If the fluid is hot, the fluid level should be in the
crosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the up-
per two holes in the dipstick).
• If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD”.
If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick
tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait
at least two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the
transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 80°F (27°C). If the fluid
level is correctly established at 80°F (27°C), it should be
between the HOT (upper) reference holes when the
transmission reaches 180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to
check the level at the normal operating temperature.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
8. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
CAUTION!
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque con-
verter shudder, and will require more frequent
fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubri-
cants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid
specifications.
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause seri-
ous damage. To prevent dirt and water from enter-
ing the transmission after checking or replenishing
fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is re-seated
properly.
Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Automatic
Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your trans-
mission fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit
your authorized dealer immediately to have the trans-
mission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with
an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission
damage.
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between
the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the
fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintain-
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between
the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm) below the
fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-
ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
surface.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-
sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-
age than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Cleaning The Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-
propriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-
age.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F100 30 Amp Pink – 110V AC Inverter – If Equipped
F101 – 10 Amp Red Interior Lights
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter in Instrument Panel/Left
Rear Power Outlet
F103 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet in Console Bin/Power
Outlet in Rear of Console
F105 – 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats – If Equipped
F106 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Power Outlet
F107 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera – If Equipped
F108 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel
F109 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control/HVAC
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F110 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
F112 – 10 Amp Red Spare
F114 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear HVAC Blower/Motor
F115 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F116 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F117 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors
F118 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
F119 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module
F120 – 10 Amp Red All Wheel Drive – If Equipped
F121 – 15 Amp Blue Wireless Ignition Node
F122 – 25 Amp Clear Driver Door Module
F123 – 25 Amp Clear Passenger Door Module
F124 – 10 Amp Red Mirrors
F125 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module
F126 – 25 Amp Clear Audio Amplifier
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F127 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – If Equipped
F128 – 15 Amp Blue Radio
F129 – 15 Amp Blue Video/DVD – If Equipped
F130 – 15 Amp Blue Climate Control/Instrument Panel
F131 – 10 Amp Red Passenger Assistance/Hands Free System
– If Equipped
F132 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Module
F133 – 10 Amp Red Spare
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
The power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F101 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
F102 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
F103 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Power Distribution Center
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F105 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Ignition Run Relay
F106 60 Amp Yellow – Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Run/Accessory Relays
F139 40 Amp Green – Climate Control System Blower
F140 30 Amp Pink – Power Locks
F141 40 Amp Green – Anti-Lock Brake System
F142 40 Amp Green – Glow Plugs – If Equipped
F143 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lights 1
F144 40 Amp Green – Exterior Lights 2
F145 30 Amp Pink – To Body Computer – Lamp
F146 30 Amp Pink – Spare
F147 30 Amp Pink – Spare
F148 40 Amp Green – Radiator Fan Motor
F149 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F150 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Control Modules
F151 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Motor – If Equipped
F152 – 25 Amp Clear Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped
F153 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F156 – 10 Amp Red Brake/Electronic Stability Control Module
F157 – 10 Amp Red Power Transfer Unit Module – If Equipped
F158 – 10 Amp Red Active Hood Module – If Equipped
F159 – 10 Amp Red Spare
F160 – 20 Amp Yellow Interior Lights
F161 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F162 40 Amp Red/20
Amp Lt. Blue
– Cabin Heater #1/Vacuum Pump –
If Equipped
F163 50 Amp Red – Cabin Heater #2 – If Equipped
F164 – 25 Amp Clear Powertrain Auto Shutdown
F165 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain Shutdown
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F166 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F167 – 30 Amp Green Powertrain Shutdown
F168 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioner Clutch
F169 40 Amp Green – Emissions – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Motor
F170 – 15 Amp Blue Emissions – Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle
Actuators
F172 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F173 – 25 Amp Clear Anti Lock Brake Valves
F174 – 20 Amp Yellow Siren – If Equipped
F175 – 30 Amp Green Spare
F176 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Modules
F177 – 20 Amp Yellow All Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
F178 – 25 Amp Clear Sunroof – If Equipped
F179 – 10 Amp Red Battery Sensor
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini-Fuse Description
F181 100 Amp Blue – Electrohydraulic Steering (EHPS) –
If Equipped
F182 50 Amp Red – Cabin Heater #3 – If Equipped
F184 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper Motor
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Incandescent) 578
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Optional LED) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Cargo Lamp 579
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamp 9006
High Beam Headlamp 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal 3757AK
Side Marker Lamp 168
Front Fog Lamp PSX24W or 2504
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp 168
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (LED Version)
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamp WY21W or 7440A
Backup Lamp W21W or 7440
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Exterior Bulbs – Rear (Bulb Version)
Bulb Number
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp P27/7W or 3157
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp P27/7W or 3157
Backup Lamp P27/7W or 3157
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left
headlamp housing.
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly ¼
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from
the headlamp housing.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
then connect the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate it ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing
the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right
front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the
wheel well.
1 — Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp Bulb
2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
3 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
4 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel
well access panel and remove the access panel.
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp
housing.
3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the replacement bulb and connector assembly
straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Front Fog Lamp Electrical Connector
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
The tail lamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the
tail lamp housing.
Inboard Tail Lamp Housing Fasteners
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the body panel and the outboard side of the
tail lamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange
on the inboard side of the tail lamp housing with the
other hand. Use the trim stick and hand pressure
together to disengage the tail lamp housing from the
vehicle.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the tail lamp
housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the tail
lamp housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
Changing The Backup Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the tail lamp
housing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the
liftgate.
Tail Lamp Housing Retainers
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the tail lamp housing and the liftgate. Use the
trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the
tail lamp housing from the liftgate.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector ¼ turn
counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
housing and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the tail lamp housing and fasteners.
Tail Gate Lamp
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
License Plate Lamp
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of
the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in
that position.
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the
lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing
and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the
housing.
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb’s
electrical connector ¼ turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
and rotate the connector ¼ turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into
the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite
end of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks
in the housing.
License Lamp
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models 20.5 Gallons 77.6 Liters
All-Wheel Drive Models 21 Gallons 79.8 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
(MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
10.7 Quarts 10.1 Liters
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
11.6 Quarts 11 Liters
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
U.S. Metric
3.6L Engine and Single or Dual-Zone Climate Control System
(MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula)
13.1 Quarts 12.4 Liters
3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
14.5 Quarts 13.7 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 En-
gine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for cor-
rect SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E85) Engine –
If Equipped
87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend MOPAR ATF+4 fluid.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) We recommend you use MOPAR Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) We recommend you use MOPAR Gear Lubricant 75W-90.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid + 4, or
MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ..............618
▫ Maintenance Chart.....................620
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500
miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is
operated predominately at idle or only very low engine
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
618 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission (4-
speed only) and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 619
Maintenance Chart
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
XXX X X X X
620 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs
(2.4L Engine). **
XX X X X
Replace spark plugs
(3.6L Engine). **
X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) whichever
comes first.
XX
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 621
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter.
X
Change the automatic transmis-
sion fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
XX
Replace rear drive assembly
(RDA) fluid.
XX
Replace power transfer unit
(PTU) fluid.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
622 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 623
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ...................627
▫ Prepare For The Appointment.............627
▫ Prepare A List ........................627
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............627
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............627
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center ............628
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .........628
▫ In Mexico Contact .....................629
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands ........629
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .............629
▫ Service Contract ......................629
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION .............631
䡵 MOPARPARTS ........................631
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............631
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................631
▫ In Canada...........................632
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............632
9
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ........633
▫ Treadwear...........................633
▫ Traction Grades .......................634
▫ Temperature Grades....................634
626 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 627
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423-6343
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
628 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 629
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
630 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 631
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan-
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 633
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
634 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 635
INDEX
10
About Your Brakes .....................441, 443
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............575
Adding Fuel .............................499
Adding Washer Fluid ......................570
Additives, Fuel ...........................494
Adjust
Down ...............................198
Forward ..............................198
Rearward .............................198
Up .................................198
AirBag.................................63
Advance Front Air Bag .................63, 65
Air Bag Operation .......................66
Air Bag Warning Light ....................75
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................67
Enhanced Accident Response ................74
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................77
FrontAirBag...........................63
If A Deployment Occurs ...................73
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................67
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............76
Side Air Bags ...........................68
Transporting Pets .......................106
Air Bag Deployment ........................63
Air Bag Light ......................75, 109, 301
Air Bag Maintenance .......................76
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) .................562
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................564
Air Conditioning Filter ..................413, 565
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips...........412, 414
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone ..............394, 407
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ..............564, 565
Air Conditioning System ....................564
Air Pressure, Tires.........................470
Alarm, Panic .............................23
Alarm (Security Alarm) ..................18, 304
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................18
638 INDEX
All Wheel Drive (AWD).....................436
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)...............574, 611
Disposal ..............................577
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................445
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................318
Appearance Care .........................586
Arming System (Security Alarm) ...............18
Assist, Hill Start ..........................448
Auto Down Power Windows ..................41
Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................120
Automatic Door Locks ......................33
Automatic Headlights ......................224
Automatic Oil Change Indicator ...............329
Automatic Transmission .................424, 581
Adding Fluid ...................582, 584, 615
Fluid And Filter Changes ..................585
Fluid Level Check ...................582, 584
Fluid Type ............................615
Gear Ranges ...........................428
Special Additives .......................582
Autostick ...............................434
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................33
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ........266
Auxiliary Power Outlet .....................266
Back-Up Lights ...........................607
Battery .............................307, 562
Charging System Light ...................307
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........24
Location ..............................562
Belts, Seat...............................109
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing ................156
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone .......143, 171
10
INDEX 639
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone ............................129, 153
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................567
B-Pillar Location ..........................464
Brake Assist System .......................447
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............444
Brake Fluid .............................615
Brake, Parking ...........................441
Brakes .................................443
Brake System .........................443, 579
Fluid Check ........................580, 615
Master Cylinder ........................580
Parking ..............................441
Warning Light .........................302
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................426
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................229
Bulb Replacement......................602, 604
Bulbs, Light ..........................111,602
Camera, Rear ............................248
Capacities, Fluid ..........................611
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................499
Oil (Engine) ........................551, 560
Power Steering .........................440
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................577
Carbon Monoxide Warning ...............108, 495
Cargo Area Cover .........................283
Cargo Area Features .......................280
Cargo Compartment .......................280
Light ................................280
Luggage Carrier ........................288
Cargo Load Floor .........................281
Cargo Management System ..................281
Rollaway Tonneau Cover ..................283
Tri-Fold Load Floor ......................281
Cargo Tie-Downs .........................282
640 INDEX
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) .................281, 501
Car Washes .............................587
Certification Label.........................501
Chains, Tire .............................481
Changing A Flat Tire .......................523
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................459
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) ...............555
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............107
Checks, Safety ...........................107
Child Restraint ............................78
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................86
Child Restraints .........................78
Child Seat Installation .................99, 101
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt ........97
Infants And Child Restraints ................81
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint ....96
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt ..............................98
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............93
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......89
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........83
Seating Positions ........................88
Using The Top Tether Anchorage ............103
Child Safety Locks .........................33
Clean Air Gasoline ........................492
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................588
Coin Holder .............................274
Cold Weather Operation ....................422
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............385
Compact Spare Tire ........................476
Computer, Trip/Travel......................332
Connector
UCI.................................384
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........384
10
INDEX 641
Conserving Fuel ..........................331
Console, Floor ...........................274
Console, Overhead ........................251
Contract, Service ..........................629
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........577
Cooling System...........................573
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............575
Coolant Capacity .......................611
Coolant Level ......................574, 578
Disposal Of Used Coolant .................577
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...................574
Inspection ............................578
Points To Remember .....................578
Pressure Cap ..........................577
Radiator Cap ..........................577
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......574, 611, 613
Corrosion Protection .......................586
Cruise Light .............................323
Cupholders ..........................272, 593
Customer Assistance .......................627
Data Recorder, Event .......................77
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............229
Daytime Running Lights ....................225
Dealer Service............................556
Defroster, Rear Window.....................287
Defroster, Windshield ......................109
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................231
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................553
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................228
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ...............582, 584
Oil (Engine) ...........................558
Power Steering .........................440
Disabled Vehicle Towing ....................546
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................577
Door
Ajar ...........................310, 311
642 INDEX
Door Ajar Light .......................310, 311
Door Locks
Door Locks ............................30
KeyFob...............................30
Remote ...............................30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................30
Door Locks, Automatic ......................33
Door Opener, Garage.......................254
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water ................................438
Driving To Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy .....331
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) .......362
E-85 Fuel ...............................496
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet)........266
Electrical Power Outlets.....................266
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................121
Electronic Brake Control System ...............444
Anti-Lock Brake System ..................445
Traction Control System ...................451
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........236
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..............451
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ........309
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ......325
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................542
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................520
Jacking ...............................523
Jump Starting ..........................538
Overheating ...........................520
Towing ..............................546
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........555
Engine .................................551
Air Cleaner ...........................562
Block Heater ..........................423
Break-In Recommendations ................106
Checking Oil Level ......................558
10
INDEX 643
Compartment .......................551, 552
Compartment Identification ................552
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................574, 613
Cooling ..............................573
Exhaust Gas Caution .................108, 495
Fails To Start ..........................422
Flooded, Starting .......................422
Fuel Requirements ......................491
Jump Starting ..........................538
Oil ...........................558, 611, 613
Oil Change Interval ......................329
Oil Filler Cap .......................551, 560
Oil Filter .............................561
Oil Selection .......................559, 611
Oil Synthetic ..........................561
Overheating ...........................520
Starting ..............................419
Engine Oil Viscosity .......................560
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ...................560
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............74
Entry System, Illuminated ....................21
Ethanol .............................492, 496
Event Data Recorder ........................77
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................108, 495
Exhaust System .......................108, 571
Exterior Folding Mirrors ....................123
Exterior Lighting..........................223
Exterior Lights ...........................111
Filler Location Fuel ........................499
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................562
Air Conditioning ....................413, 565
Engine Oil .........................561, 613
Engine Oil Disposal .....................561
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................520
Turn Signal .....................111,227, 322
644 INDEX
Flash-To-Pass ............................228
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range .........................498
Engine Oil ............................497
Fuel Requirements ...................496, 497
Maintenance ...........................498
Replacement Parts .......................498
Starting ..............................498
Flooded Engine Starting ....................422
Floor Console ............................274
Fluid, Brake .............................615
Fluid Capacities ..........................611
Fluid Leaks..............................111
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ...............582, 584
Brake ............................580, 615
Cooling System .........................574
Engine Oil ............................558
Power Steering ......................440, 615
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ...........613
Fog Lights ...........................226, 605
Fog Light Service .........................605
Folding Rear Seat ......................211,218
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................542
Fuel...................................491
Adding ..............................499
Additives .............................494
Clean Air .............................492
Conserving ............................331
Ethanol ...........................492, 496
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................499
Gasoline ..............................491
Light ................................319
Materials Added ........................494
Methanol .............................492
Octane Rating ......................491, 613
Requirements ..........................491
Saver
Mode ...........................331
10
INDEX 645
Specifications ..........................613
Tank Capacity ..........................611
Fuel, Flexible ............................496
Fueling ................................499
Fuel Optimizer ...........................331
Fuel Saver ..............................331
Fuses ..................................594
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..........254, 261
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ................499, 554
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................492
Gasoline (Fuel)
Conserving ............................331
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................492
Gear Ranges .............................428
Gear Select Lever Override ..................544
General Information ....................147, 183
Glass Cleaning ...........................592
Gross Axle Weight Rating ................501, 504
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..............501, 503
GVWR .................................501
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .........................438
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................520
Headlights
Automatic ............................224
Bulb Replacement .......................604
Cleaning .............................592
Delay ................................225
High Beam ............................604
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........228
Lights On Reminder .....................225
On With Wipers .....................224, 234
Passing ..............................228
Switch ...............................223
Time Delay ............................225
646 INDEX
Head Restraints ..........................206
Heated Mirrors ...........................123
Heater, Engine Block .......................423
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .228
Hill Start Assist...........................448
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................506
Holder, Coin.............................274
Holder, Cup .............................272
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)..............254
Hood Release ............................221
Ignition
Key..................................12
Illuminated Entry ..........................21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................16
Information Center, Vehicle ..................325
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................119
Instrument Cluster .....................305, 322
Instrument Panel And Controls ...............296
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............592
Interior Appearance Care....................591
Interior Fuses ............................595
Interior Lights ...........................228
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............231
Introduction ..............................4
Inverter, Power ...........................270
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................384
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ................155
Jacking Instructions........................528
Jack Location ............................524
Jack Operation ........................523, 528
Jump Starting ............................538
Key Fob
Panic Alarm ............................23
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........17, 24
10
INDEX 647
Programming Additional Transmitters .......17, 24
Key-In Reminder ..........................14
Keyless Enter-N-Go .....................36, 420
Keyless Entry System .......................21
Keyless Go...............................12
Key, Replacement ..........................17
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................16
Lane Change And Turn Signals ...............227
Lane Change Assist........................228
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................49
Latches.................................111
Hood ................................221
Lead Free Gasoline ........................491
Leaks, Fluid .............................111
Life Of Tires .............................479
Liftgate .................................44
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ...............286
Light Bulbs ..........................111,602
Lights ..............................111,223
AirBag ........................75, 109, 301
Automatic Headlights ....................224
Back-Up ..............................607
Brake Assist Warning ....................454
Brake Warning .........................302
Bulb Replacement .......................604
Courtesy/Reading ......................230
Cruise ...............................323
Daytime Running .......................225
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............227, 228
Engine Temperature Warning ...............305
Exterior ..............................111
Fog..............................226, 605
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................520
Headlights .........................223, 604
Headlights On Reminder ..................225
Headlights On With Wipers .............224, 234
648 INDEX
Headlight Switch .......................223
High Beam ........................228, 604
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............228
Illuminated Entry ........................21
Instrument Cluster ......................223
Intensity Control ........................229
Interior ..............................228
License ..............................610
Lights On Reminder .....................225
Low Fuel .............................319
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........312
Map Reading ..........................230
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........229
Park .............................321, 604
Passing ..............................228
Reading ..............................230
Rear Servicing .........................607
Rear Tail Lamps ........................607
Seat Belt Reminder ......................300
Security Alarm .........................304
Service ...........................602, 604
Side Marker ...........................604
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .........315, 484
Traction Control ........................454
Turn Signal ..............111,227, 322, 604, 607
Vanity Mirror ..........................124
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .305, 322
Load Floor, Cargo .........................281
Loading Vehicle .......................501, 502
Capacities ............................502
Tires ................................464
Locks ..................................30
Automatic Door .........................33
Auto Unlock ...........................33
Child Protection .........................33
Door .................................30
Power Door ............................32
Low Tire Pressure System ...................484
10
INDEX 649
Lubrication, Body .........................567
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ...................288
Lug Nuts ...............................522
Maintenance Free Battery....................562
Maintenance Procedures ....................557
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .312, 555
Manual, Service ..........................632
Manual Transaxle
Fluid Level Check ...................585, 586
Lubricant Selection ...................585, 586
Map/Reading Lights .......................230
Marker Lights, Side........................604
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................580
Methanol ...............................492
Mini-Trip Computer .......................332
Mirrors .............................119,253
Automatic Dimming .....................120
Electric Powered ........................121
Electric Remote .........................121
Exterior Folding ........................123
Heated ...............................123
Outside ..............................121
Rearview .............................119
Vanity ...............................124
Mode
Fuel Saver ............................331
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................484
MOPAR Parts.........................556, 631
MTBE/ETBE ............................492
Multi-Function Control Lever .................227
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................106
Occupant Restraints ........................45
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel).............491, 613
Oil Change Indicator .......................329
650 INDEX
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................329
Oil, Engine ..........................558, 613
Capacity ..............................611
Change Interval .....................329, 559
Checking .............................558
Dipstick ..............................558
Disposal ..............................561
Filter .............................561, 613
Filter Disposal .........................561
Identification Logo ......................559
Materials Added To ......................561
Pressure Warning Light ...................308
Recommendation ....................559, 611
Synthetic .............................561
Viscosity ..........................560, 611
Oil Filter, Change .........................561
Oil Filter, Selection ........................561
Oil Pressure Light .........................308
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................553
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) .............254
Operating Precautions ......................553
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................121
Overhead Console.........................251
Overheating, Engine .......................520
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ..........4,632
Paint Care ..............................586
Panic Alarm ..............................23
Parking Brake............................441
ParkSense System, Rear .....................241
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System)......216
Passing Light ............................228
Pets ...................................106
Phone (Pairing)...........................155
Phone (Uconnect) ......................125, 148
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ..........465
10
INDEX 651
Power
Brakes ...............................443
Distribution Center (Fuses) ................598
Door Locks ............................32
Inverter ..............................270
Mirrors ..............................121
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........266
Seats ................................198
Steering ...........................439, 440
Sunroof ..............................263
Transfer Unit ..........................586
Windows ..............................40
Power Seats
Down ...............................198
Forward ..............................198
Rearward .............................198
Up .................................198
Power Steering Fluid.......................615
Power Transfer Unit ....................586, 615
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............56
Preparation For Jacking .....................525
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................57
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .21
Radial Ply Tires ..........................472
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........577
Radio Frequency
General Information ............15, 18, 26, 29, 40
Radio Operation ..........................386
Radio Remote Controls .....................384
Rear Air Conditioning...................394, 407
Rear Axle (Differential) .....................585
Rear Camera ............................248
Rear Cupholder ..........................272
Rear Drive Assembly.......................585
Rear Liftgate .............................44
Rear ParkSense System .....................241
652 INDEX
Rear Seat, Folding......................211,218
Rear Window Defroster .....................287
Rear Window Features .....................286
Rear Wiper/Washer........................286
Reclining Front Seats .......................203
Reclining Rear Seats ....................215, 218
Recorder, Event Data .......................77
Recreational Towing .......................516
Reformulated Gasoline .....................492
Refrigerant ..............................565
Release, Hood............................221
Reminder, Lights On .......................225
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................47
Remote Control
Starting System .........................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ..................21
Panic Alarm ............................23
Programming Additional Key Fobs .........17, 24
Programming Additional Transmitters .......17, 24
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........384
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .................28, 29
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle ............................29
Remote Starting System......................26
Replacement Bulbs ........................602
Replacement Keys .........................17
Replacement Parts.........................556
Replacement Tires .........................480
Reporting Safety Defects ....................631
Resetting Oil Change Indicator................329
Restraint, Head...........................206
Restraints, Child...........................78
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ................283
Reverse Lights ...........................607
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .................542
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) ...................288
10
INDEX 653
Rotation, Tires ...........................483
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................109
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................111
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................631
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................108
Safety Information, Tire .....................457
Safety Tips ..............................107
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......54
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........57
Energy Management Feature ................57
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................52
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................49
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............54
Pregnant Women ........................56
Seat Belt Extender .......................55
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................57
Seat Belt Reminder .......................47
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................593
Seat Belt Reminder .........................47
Seat Belts ............................47, 109
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................54
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........54
Child Restraint ..........................78
Extender ..............................55
Front Seat ........................47, 49, 52
Inspection ............................109
Operating Instructions ....................52
Pregnant Women ........................56
Pretensioners ...........................57
Rear Seat ..............................49
Reminder .............................300
Untwisting Procedure .....................54
Seats............................197, 198, 201
Adjustment ........................197, 198
Easy Entry ............................216
Heated ...............................201
654 INDEX
Height Adjustment ...................198, 204
Power ...............................198
Rear Folding .......................211,218
Reclining .............................203
Reclining Rear ......................215, 218
Seatback Release .................204, 211, 218
Tilting ...............................198
Security Alarm.........................18, 304
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..............613
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming .......................17
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................16
Sentry Key Replacement .....................17
Service Assistance .........................627
Service Contract ..........................629
Service Manuals ..........................632
Shift Lever Override .......................544
Shoulder Belts ............................49
Side View Mirror Adjustment.................121
Signals, Turn ...................111,227, 322, 607
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ...................481
Snow Tires ..............................474
Spare Tire.....................475, 476, 477, 525
Spark Plugs .............................613
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .........................613
Oil..................................613
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ...........................240
Cancel ...............................238
Resume ..............................238
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................236
Starting..............................26, 419
Automatic Transmission ..................419
Cold Weather ..........................422
Engine Fails To Start .....................422
Remote ...............................26
Starting And Operating .....................419
10
INDEX 655
Starting Procedures ........................419
Steering
Column Controls .......................227
Column Lock ..........................234
Power ............................439, 440
Tilt Column ...........................234
Wheel, Heated .........................235
Wheel, Tilt ............................234
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ............384, 385
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .384
Storage, Vehicle...........................413
Stuck, Freeing............................542
Sunglasses Storage ........................252
Sun Roof ...............................263
Sun Visor Extension .......................124
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag .........63
Sway Control, Trailer.......................504
Synthetic Engine Oil .......................561
System, Remote Starting .....................26
Taillights ...............................607
Telescoping Steering Column .................234
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................282
Tilt Steering Column .......................234
Time Delay, Headlight ......................225
Tire And Loading Information Placard .......464, 465
Tire Markings ............................457
Tires.........................111,469, 475, 633
Aging (Life Of Tires) .....................479
Air Pressure ...........................469
Chains ...............................481
Changing .............................523
Compact Spare .........................476
General Information ..................469, 475
High Speed ...........................472
Inflation Pressures .......................470
Jacking ...............................523
656 INDEX
Life Of Tires ...........................479
Load Capacity ......................464, 465
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............484
Pressure Warning Light ...................315
Quality Grading ........................633
Radial ...............................472
Replacement ...........................480
Rotation ..............................483
Safety ............................457, 469
Sizes ................................459
Snow Tires ............................474
Spare Tire ...................475, 476, 477, 525
Spinning .............................478
Trailer Towing .........................511
Tread Wear Indicators ....................478
Tire Safety Information .....................457
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................508
To Open Hood ...........................221
Towing ................................503
Behind A Motorhome ....................516
Disabled Vehicle ........................546
Guide ...............................507
Recreational ...........................516
Weight ...............................507
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome ...........516
Traction .............................436, 437
Traction Control ..........................451
Trailer Towing ...........................503
Cooling System Tips .....................515
Hitches ..............................506
Minimum Requirements ..................509
Tips.................................514
Trailer And Tongue Weight ................508
Wiring ...............................512
Trailer Towing Guide.......................507
T
railer Weight............................507
Transaxle
Autostick .............................434
10
INDEX 657
Transmission
Automatic .........................424, 581
Filter ................................585
Fluid .............................581, 585
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....254
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)..................21, 24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........21
Transporting Pets .........................106
Tread Wear Indicators ......................478
Turn Signals ......................227, 322, 607
UCI Connector ...........................384
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity ...........143, 171
Operation .........................127, 151
Phone Call Features ..................134, 162
Phone Features .....................139, 167
Screen Activated Features ...............23, 336
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone .....................143, 172
Uconnect Settings .....................23, 29
Uconnect Phone..........125, 128, 129, 148, 151, 152
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress ..............165
Bluetooth Communication Link .............177
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name .......135, 163
Call Continuation .......................166
Call Controls .......................135, 163
Cancel Command ....................129, 152
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing ................156
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone ..........171
Far End Audio Performance ................173
Help Command .....................129, 152
Join Calls ..........................138, 166
658 INDEX
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress..............................165
Natural Speech .....................128, 151
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ............166
Power-Up ............................177
Redial ...............................166
Toggling Between Calls ...................166
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone . . .143, 171
Voice Command ........................172
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ..............162
Uconnect Settings .......................22, 23
Uconnect Voice Command ...................183
Underhood Fuses .........................598
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................633
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .384
Universal Transmitter ......................254
Unleaded Gasoline ........................491
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................54
Vanity Mirrors ...........................124
Vehicle Certification Label ...................501
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ....................465, 501, 502
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) ..........18
Vehicle Storage ...........................413
Viscosity, Engine Oil .......................560
Voice Command ..........................183
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................520
Warnings And Cautions ......................6
Warranty Information ......................631
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................570
Washers, Windshield ................230, 233, 570
Washing Vehicle ..........................587
Water
Driving Through ........................438
10
INDEX 659
Wheel And Wheel Trim .....................588
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .................588
Wind Buffeting ........................43, 265
Window Fogging .........................413
Windows ................................40
Power ................................40
Wind Buffeting ..........................43
Windshield Defroster.......................109
Windshield Washers ....................230, 233
Fluid ................................570
Windshield Wiper Blades....................568
Windshield Wipers ........................230
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................568
Wiper, Delay.............................231
Wiper, Rear .............................286
Wipers, Intermittent .......................231
Wrecker Towing ..........................546
660 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Fifth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
16JC49-126-AE
©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS
®
